Talavera & Vimeiro

Talavera & Vimeiro Rulebook

Table of Contents

Series Rules v3.0
Talavera Game Rules
Vimeiro Game Rules
- 1.0 General Rules
  - 1.1 Counter Nomenclature
  - 1.2 The Atlantic
- 2.0 British Special Rules
Series Charts and Tables (NBS v3.0)
NBS Series Errata

Series Rules v3.0

1.0 Introduction

Welcome to the Napoleonic Battle Series .

It is said that winning a war is all about being first at the right place with the most troops. The same school of reasoning easily boils down the art of running an army to phrases such as "maintenance of aim" and "economy of force". And that sounds pretty simple, doesn't it? Sitting in front of the fireplace in our studies we are all world-class economic aim- maintainers.

If that sounds a bit theoretical for your taste? Welcome to the Napoleonic Battle Series . Our goal is to run you out of your study and put you in charge of an army. We will give you a taste of what it was like to run armies before there were such things as radios, satellites and telephones. And to keep you focused we will take you away from the intricate workings of early 19th century tactics. You will be the one to decide who and when your troopers will fight. The commander. Your army has droves of officers to straighten lines and rally hussars, to aim guns and to decide which battalion should go first up the hill. But there is only one of you, the man who for bad or good decides which hill to go up in the first place. The commander. You will make the decisions that others will implement. And you will soon discover that there is a bit more to economic aim-maintainance than reaching for your brandy tumbler.

Welcome to the Napoleonic Battle Series . You are in command!

2.0 Game Components

2.1 The Game Map

The map depicts the area in which the battle or campaign was fought.

2.1.1 Hex Numbering System

Every hex on the game map is identified by a hex number (e.g. 29.17). The digits before the decimal point (29.xx) indicate the vertical hex column, reading along the map from left to right. The digits after the decimal point (xx.17) identify the exact hex in the column, reading from bottom to top. To reduce map clutter, hex numbers are printed only on every fifth row of hexes (xx.05, xx.10, xx.15). To find hex 29.17, for example, follow the xx.15 row until you find the 29.xx column, then count up two hexes to 29.17. If the game uses more than one map, any reference to a hex number will include the appropriate map letter, as in B29.17.

2.1.2 Map Edge Hexes

Edge hexes with at least half of the hex showing are playable. Tiny hex slivers are not.

2.1.3 Turn Record Track

This track indicates the passage of time. The first and last daylight turns have a number in the turn box to indicate the visibility (in hexes) for that turn. Shading on the Turn Record Track indicates night turns. Advance the Turn Record Marker one box during the Turn End Phase; advance the Day Marker at the end of the midnight turn.

2.1.4 Entry Hexes

These hexes show where reinforcements arrive.

2.2 The Rules

Every MMP/The Gamers' brand game contains separate Series and Game rulebooks. The Series rulebook contains the rules generally applicable to all the games in the series. Where necessary, the rules will have special instructions for how to convert older games to the latest series rules. The Game rulebook gives the details needed for a specific game, including any special rules, scenarios, and set up information.

Sidebar

OLDER GAMES These rules are tested with the older games in the series. In cases in which these rules and the rules of the pre-3.0 games conflict boxes such as this one will help you out.

2.3 The Counters

The playing pieces represent both the units that actually fought in the battle and "markers" which display information. They can be divided into the following:

2.3.1 Combat Units

These units represent combat formations of infantry, cavalry, artillery, and Skirmishers. Each has a facing and one or more formations available. Skirmishers are not considered infantry units for the purpose of these rules.

2.3.2 Commanders and Headquarters (HQ)

These units represent individual Commanders (named on the counter) and a small staff escort. Commanders and HQs fulfill important command and morale functions. They have no facing or formation and do not count for stacking in any way.

2.3.3 Line Extensions and Detached Artillery

These represent the expansion of troop units to take up more ground space. Unless otherwise noted, these counters are treated as combat units for all game puposes.

2.3.5 Markers

Markers are used to indicate specific unit conditions, such as Morale States and strength levels, or specialist formations such as squares. The B/C markers can be used to mark unit strength if players wish, but they are only really needed to keep track of extender strength for an AAB size unit with two Line Extenders.

2.4 The Loss Charts

Each player uses his Loss Charts to keep track of Casualties, Stragglers, Skirmisher deployment and Wrecked brigades and divisions.

(The printed rulebook illustrates here the counter layouts and a Loss Chart row: combat units with strength levels, formations and morale states, artillery, cavalry and Commanders/HQs. These illustrations are not reproduced.)

3.0 Game Concepts And Definitions

3.1 Scale

Each hex equals 180-200 meters.
Each day-time turn represents 30 minutes, each night turn one hour.
The vertical scale between contours is 9-10 meters.
A strength point of infantry represents 150 men.
A cavalry strength point is 100 men.
A gun point of artillery is roughly 3 cannons.

Throughout these rules, the term "Brigade" is used for all kinds of infantry and cavalry units, even though they may have been called demi-brigades or regiments in real life. Artillery units are similarly known as "batteries" - regardless of size.

3.2 11..66 Dice Rolls

These rules use "sequential" dice rolls occasionally. These require two differently colored dice. Roll them and read the result as follows: The colored die is the first digit, the white one the second (a colored six and a white four would be 64).

3.3 Set Up Notes

Aside from any special notes in the game rules concerning set up, the following apply: 1. "w/i X" means to set up a given unit at or within X hexes of the hex listed. 2. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, Commanders set up with any subordinate unit. 3. Units set up in any desired formation and facing. 4. Units may never start over-stacked. 5. Units generally start at full strength. Some scenarios list pre-scenario losses that must be taken by the appropriate units. 6. Skirmishers may be deployed within 2 hexes of their parent unit. 7. A unit ID notation followed by a "b"—as in RWb—means an artillery battery of that ID. Furthermore, artillery is further classified by type—either heavy or light—and mobility class—foot or horse. The type and mobility class are given in parentheses following the notation. Thus, a RWb (Lh) would be a Right Wing light horse battery, while a RWb (Hf) would be a Right Wing heavy foot battery. Unless otherwise noted, artillery units have 5 gun points. Should a battery of lesser strength be called for, its notation would read: RWb (3Hh), being a Right Wing heavy horse 3 gun point battery. 8. A hex notation of (hex 1) ex (hex 2) means the unit is in hex 1 and has a Line Extension in hex 2. Likewise, (hex 1) ex (hex 2), (hex 3) means that the unit in hex 1 has Line Extensions in hexes 2 and 3.

3.4 Rounding

Unless specifically noted otherwise in the rules, retain fractions.

3.5 Excess Results

If a modified die-roll result is outside the listed table intervals, treat it as the nearest listed result.

3.6 Retreat vs Withdrawal

Throughout the rules, the terms retreat and withdrawal are used. They are not interchangeable. A retreat is an uncontrolled retrograde movement, while a withdrawal is considered regular movement. A withdrawing unit is subject to both Reaction Charges and Opportunity Fire, a retreating unit can be Reaction Charged, but not the target of Opportunity Fire.

Sidebar

Some math that might be of interest. One hundred and fifty men in a three rank (standard Napoleonic infantry) formation has a frontage of slightly less than 35 meters. This means - as a note for future discussions - that it would take less than six of these 150 man-blocks to fill out one of our 200 meter hexes. Less than 900 men. A large batallion. More people there will just get in other people's way or have to file in behind the first line. It might also be worth noting here that the third rank in these formations did not usually fire as it was too dangerous for the men in front.

Example: A unit in Line formation with 5 Movement Points (MP) left becomes Disorganized (DG). Since Disorganized units have their remaining MPs halved, it now has 2.5 MPs left.

Example: You roll a 6 with a +3 modifier, becoming a 9. If the table only goes to 7, read from that row to get the result.

3.7 Hindering, Blocking and Fortified Terrain

The rules use the terms Hindering, Blocking and Fortified terrain from time to time. 3.7.1 Hindering and Blocking terrain types are defined on the Movement Table. Hindering terrain is everything that costs more than 1 MP to enter or cross. It prevents Cavalry Charges into it and gives benefits to Skirmishers. Blocking terrain blocks line of sight by adding elevation to the hex. 3.7.2 Fortified terrain is man-made obstacles which give a strong advantage to the defender in combat. Examples are redoubts, city walls, sunken roads and walled farms. Fortified terrain give some important modifiers on the combat tables. It is also automatically Hindering. Since the types are so varied, the game specific rules list which terrain is fortified and the movement cost for such terrain. Note that villages are NOT fortified. See 19.0.

4.0 Fog of War

Players can only examine enemy stacks at or within 12 hexes of a friendly Commander and within that Commander's LOS.

To increase the reality of the simulation, keep the following secret: 1) Casualties, Stragglers and Wrecked conditions. 2) Orders, order delivery, or plans. There is also an optional rule for Concealed Forces at the end of these rules.

5.0 Turn Sequence

A game turn consist of two player turns; the First player turn and the Second player turn. Unless specified otherwise in the game specific rules the French player is always the First player. An outline Sequence of Play is provided in the charts.

5.1 Narrative Sequence of Play

First Player Turn

Command Phase Random Events (Optional) Roll a die. On a 1, a Random Event has occurred. Check the Random Events Tables. (29.0). Discover Distorted Orders Roll a die for each Distorted Order. On a 5 or 6 the problem is discovered and new orders can be issued. (6.5.3). Order Issue The Phasing Player generates orders, paying for each with his available Command Points. He then logs these orders on the Order Log Sheet and notes their arrival times. (6.0). Local Initiative The Phasing Player can roll for his units that wish to obtain Initiative Orders. Any Default Defenses and Emergency Withdrawals are declared. (6.6) Attack Stoppage Checks Any of the Phasing Player's commands that will be under Engage Orders in the current turn must check Attack Stoppage. (6.7). Delay Reduction Check any orders in Delay to see if their delay ends. (6.5.2). New Order Acceptance Roll to see if orders delivered this turn are Accepted, Delayed or Distorted. (6.5).

Phasing Fire Phase The Phasing Player fires with his artillery units (17.0) and Skirmishers (18.0).

Movement Phase Phasing units can move based on their movement abilities, formations, and order restrictions. Infantry units can enter enemy-occupied hexes to fight in the Close Combat Phase. Skirmishers can be released and recovered. Cavalry Charges (16.0) are resolved. Reaction Charges (16.5) and Opportunity Fire (17.4) can occur. The Command Status of the Phasing Players units is checked (6.11).

Sidebar

OLDER GAMES Austerlitz : The Santon Redoubt and the Sokolnitz castle are Fortified terrain. Treat as Town/Villages for movement (but not combat). Marengo: The Tête de Pont hexsides are Fortified. Aspern-Essling: The Flood Dyke hexsides are Fortified. The Grainary and the Great Garden are Fortified and are treated as Town/Villages for movement (but not combat) purposes.

Non-Phasing Fire Phase. The Non-Phasing Player fires with his artillery units (17.0) and Skirmishers (18.0).

Close Combat Phase (15.0) Resolve Close Combat in the hexes where friendly and enemy units are stacked together.

Rally Phase Straggler Recovery Units can attempt to recover Stragglers (20.3.2). Erase recovered Stragglers from the Loss Chart. Rally and Rout Retreat The Phasing Player checks to see which Shaken (Sh) units return to Normal, Disorganized (DG) units to Shaken, and Routed (R) units to DG, or if Blood Lusted (BL) units revert to Normal. The player can choose to not rally Routed units if he desires. Cavalry Recovery Segment The Phasing player can attempt to recover cavalry which has become "Blown.". (22.2.3).

Second Player Turn The Second Player repeats the above with the roles reversed.

Game Turn End Phase Game Turn Marker Advance. (2.1.3).

5.2 Close Combat Subsequence

During the Movement Phase 1) Attacker enters the enemy occupied hex at the cost of movement into the hex plus an additional 2 MP cost. Defending Squares change formation to Column and have their Morale State reduced by 1. 2) Defending artillery performs Opportunity Fire. During the Close Combat Phase 3) Check to Stand. See 15.2.1 for the order. 4) Check the outcome (defender Rout, attacker repulsed or Firefight) and roll on the appropriate tables to determine the result. 5) Loser (attacker in a Firefight) Retreats.

5.3 Cavalry Charge Subsequence: Against Infantry/

Artillery 1) Attacker announces charging stack and target hex. 2) Units in the target hex can choose to form Square. This can trigger Opportunity Fire and Morale Degradation. 3) The attacker moves into the target hex. This can trigger Opportunity Fire or Reaction Charges along the way. 4) The defender checks to stand. If successful, go to 6, otherwise, continue. 5) The Charge is successful. Roll for Opportunity Fire from defending artillery in the target hex. Check the combat result on the appropriate tables. The defender is Routed and retreats out of the hex. Follow-up charges are possible. Otherwise, the charge ends. Go to 9. 6) The attacking cavalry attempts Breakoff. If it fails, go to 8, otherwise continue. 7) Determine Breakoff effect. The Charge ends. Go to 9. 8) The Cavalry Charge is repulsed. Roll for Opportunity Fire from defending artillery in the target hex. Check the combat result on the appropriate tables. The Charge ends. Go to 9. 9) The attacker retreats 6-12 hexes and then becomes Blown.

5.4 Cavalry Charge Subsequence: Against Other Cavalry

1) Attacker announces charging stack and target hex. 2) The attacker moves into the target hex. This can trigger Opportunity Fire or Reaction Charges along the way. 3) Check to Stand. See 16.4.1.1 for the order. 4) Determine the combat result on the appropriate tables. 5) The charge ends. Both sides retreat 6-12 hexes and then become Blown.

6.0 Command and Control

To simulate the lack of intelligence and inertia of the battlefield, units need to follow written instructions, orders, to perform actions. These are either issued by the Army Commander through a formal procedure with a certain amount of delay, or through Local Initiative, which can sometimes go awry.

6.1 Command and Control Hierarchy

Armies have a hierarchal structure. From lowest to highest, the basic combat units are brigades. Divisions are collections of brigades with a Divisional Commander representing its administrative center. Corps are a collection of divisions with a Corps HQ as the administrative hub and a Corps Commander receiving orders and giving morale support. At the top of the command structure is the Army HQ and its Commander. In the ideal case, each side of a game consists of one army of several corps, each corps having a number of divisions consisting of a number of brigades. Ideal cases were rare in this era, however, and in the games you will find all sorts of exceptions, armies consisting of just divisions, or a mix of divisions and corps, brigades directly under a corps without a division to report to, or even directly under the army. There are also other types of formations, such as advance guards, wings and columns, which are usually treated either as divisions or corps, respectively. These rules cover all the main cases, with exceptions covered by game specific rules. A corps, division or brigade acting on its own orders is simply called a Command in these rules. The divisions and brigades belonging to a command are called Sub-units .

6.2 What is an Order?

Orders are written instructions to the commands describing what they are to do. An order is not a hex by hex movement record. It is a general instruction to a command as to what its objectives are and how it is to achieve them. An attack order would typically have a geographic objective to be captured and a route of advance. A defense order has an area to defend, and perhaps a line of withdrawal to fall back along if things become too hot. An order can have several parts of different character, such as take an objective and defend it against counterattacks. It cannot be overstated that orders must be followed as originally intended, even though game circumstances may change. They represent wartime orders in an era influenced by notions of glory and honor which seem quaint today. Players should never rethink their orders to find loopholes which allow them to "get away with" something. Orders can be followed with a modified degree of enthusiasm (so as to avoid disaster), but their intention, scope, or original purpose should not be altered. 6.2.1 To be acted on, an order must be implemented . An unimplemented order (in transit or delay) has not yet become active, and the command is still executing its old order (if any). More on that below.

6.2.2 Pre-Set Orders

The scenario instructions usually specify the orders for each command at the start of a scenario. These orders represent the Commander's initial plan of action for the battle. Unless otherwise specified, these orders are accepted before the game begins. Players can change pre-set orders if they agree to do so, but at their own risk. Be aware that you're acting with hindsight, and this can seriously upset the balance of a given scenario.

6.3 Order Types

The written instructions of an order can either be of Engage or General character, and a unit will be under either type of orders, or in No Orders Status , at any given time. Engage Orders are required for a command to attack, but it must check for Attack Stoppage. General Orders let a unit defend, maneuver and recover Stragglers, but it can not attack. Units in No Orders Status are considered to be in reserve, and are very restricted in their abilities, but will react more quickly to new orders.

6.3.1 Engage Orders

An order that allows for movement to, into, or around areas of enemy control or tacit control (e.g. a gap) EVEN IF it will NOT require combat, is an Engage Order. Engage Orders allow offensive combat.

A command under Engage Orders must check for Attack Stoppage each turn (6.7).
A unit under Engage Orders can not recover Stragglers (20.3.2).

Sidebar

THIS IS THE HEAVY BIT! Have patience and some faith as this somewhat lengthy chapter is what makes these games truly unique.

1 division of voltigeurs composed of 3 brigades and 1 battery.

division of tirailleurs composed of 3 brigades and 1 battery.

1 cavalry brigade

1 corps artillery

Real Orders "The Heavy Cavalry will as soon as it arrives take up position as reserve behind the Imperial Guard." "The Duke will march on Eckmühl with his three divisions and surround the enemy." "Push forward your cavalry and horse artillery to Memmingen, which you must reach with your leading division before 0900 hours." "In the direction of my butt; attack!" "Proceed to Apolda in order to fall on the rear of the enemy army." "Attack whatever that is in front of you and drive it back vigorously." "Move as to fall on either Prince Karl's rear or on the column between Freising and Moosburg." "Drive them off the hill."

6.3.2 General Orders

A General Order is one that does not fit the conditions of an Engage Order, and thus does not allow for offensive combat. Defending in place is allowed in General Orders, as well as local counterattacks, slowly falling back along a pre-defined line, and moving behind well defined friendly frontlines.

A unit under General Orders can recover Stragglers.
A Command under General Orders can achieve Initiative Orders more easily.
A command marching (i.e. moving longer than just redeploying within a defended area) under General Orders that comes into contact with enemy units must either accept a Default Defense (6.6.2), or enter No Orders Status (6.3.4).

6.3.3 Complex Orders

A single order can contain stages of both General and Engage Order type, such as marching to a staging area and attacking from there. The stage the command is about to execute the current turn defines what type of order it is under for the purpose of Attack Stoppage, the chances of getting Initiative, etc. When a new order is sent, it is considered to be an Engage Order for the purposes of order cost, etc, if any part of it is akin to an Engage Order.

6.3.4 No Orders Status

A unit not currently under any orders is considered to be in No Orders Status, and is severely limited in its ability to act. On the positive side, it accepts new orders and recovers Stragglers more easily. 6.3.4.1 A command will enter No Orders Status:

after executing an Emergency Withdrawal.
when accepting an order to enter No Orders Status.
when marching under General Orders and coming into enemy contact.
the turn after a Loose Cannon result.
when an order can be considered completed. Other than these situations, a unit can not voluntarily enter No Orders Status. In the last two cases, the player has a choice of accepting a Default Defense (6.6.2) or entering No Orders Status, which one is most advantageous depends on the situation. 6.3.4.2 If a corps is without orders, the Corps HQ is "bolted to the ground" and cannot be moved until it accepts new orders or executes an Emergency Withdrawal. Subordinate Divisional Commanders and brigades are free to move around as long as they stay within Command Range. 6.3.4.3 If an independent division is without orders, its Divisional Commander has to stay in its current hex until it accepts new orders or executes an Emergency Withdrawal, but the brigades can move around within Command Range. 6.3.4.4 An independent brigade in No Orders Status must remain in its hex, but can change facing. 6.3.4.5 Units in No Orders Status have limitations on what they can do. See the box to the right.

6.3.5 Actions Which Do Not Require Orders

Many game functions do not require, or need to be mentioned in, orders. See the box to the right. The order status of the unit may still put limits on functions like Straggler Recovery.

Even though they do not exist as a special category, defensive orders are here to stay. This is because even though individual Napoleonic units may be set up for defense in minutes, slinging out a whole division takes a while longer, especially if you want to get the best out of your guns and horsemen. Hence defense just does not happen. It has to be ordered. The concept also forces you to think in terms of mission and purpose just like a real officer would. Is the third division meant to just hang around the village or are they to defend it as a part of your plan?

Sidebar

Complex Orders are very useful if one wants to avoid having to check for Attack Stoppage during a march to a deployment area. Of course at the risk of having the command failing its orders if something unexpected happens en route, but that is just how things work in real life.

There is no "reserve order status" in the system. Rather we have decided that commanders having no orders are more likely to accept a new order than some poor guy fighting for his life. Hence your best reserves are not the guys doubling as defenders. People will also notice that it is easier to get the initiative while under General Orders, the rationale behind this being that people that are in on the current situation but not in the middle of a fire-fight are the ones that will have the easiest time adopting to new developments.

Units in No Orders Status

have their Command Ranges halved (6.11)

cannot fire in Fire Phases (artillery can still Opportunity Fire)

cannot initiate Close Combat (except against Skirmishers)

cannot initiate Cavalry Charges (with the exception of Reaction Charges)

cannot adopt Default Defense (6.6.2)

recover Stragglers more easily

get a bonus on Order Acceptance

Actions Which Do Not Require Orders

Army and Corps Commander movement and functions (Divisional Commander and HQ movement, however, is bound by the limits of their orders).

6.4 Issuing Orders

The Army Commander has a specific number of Command Points available each turn. The player uses these points to pay for orders he writes. The cost of orders varies depending on their type and delivery method. Write the order on scratch paper (the order sheet) and record it on the Order Log (a sheet of lined notebook paper). The player calculates the arrival turn, according to the distance from the Army Commander to the recipient, and records it on the Order Log. The recipient can be a Corps HQ, Army HQ, Divisional Commander or specific brigade (see box). On the arrival turn, the player checks the order for acceptance. Once accepted, the orders are implemented instantly. If a Corps Commander is away from his HQ when an order is accepted, the order is implemented the instant the Corps Commander reenters his HQ's hex.

6.4.1 Order Costs

Players write orders using Command Points. Each Army Commander possesses a certain number of Command Points based on his Command rating (given on the Command Points Table). Order costs appear on the Order Costs portion of the Command Points Chart. Determine the method of delivery and type of an order and sum up the cost. Command Points cannot be saved from turn to turn and are wasted if unused. A player can not write an order if he does not have sufficient Command Points available to pay the cost of the order.

6.4.2 Order Type

Each order must be classified as either an Engage or a General Order. If any part of an order's instructions are Engage type, it is considered an Engage Order.

6.4.3 Order Delivery Method

The Army Commander has the choice of three different methods of order delivery: Aide Oral, Aide Written, and In-person (oral). With the first two methods, the Army Commander gives the order to an aide de camp for delivery to the recipient. Aide Oral delivery requires fewer Command Points than Aide Written orders, but also increases the risk of Delay or Distortion of the orders. In-person (oral) means the Army Commander issues the order directly to the recipient, without using an aide. This reduces both the cost and risk of delay. The Army Commander must be stacked with the recipient to issue an In-person order.

6.4.4 Order Format and Writing

Write your orders in any manner you are comfortable with and understand. The order's written contents can be as detailed or brief as desired, provided the player can interpret his own orders. Engage Orders also require a general movement direction or path, and a reasonable limit to the operation. "Open-ended orders" (e.g. Attack west!) are not allowed: they are too vague.

6.4.5 Order Log

Record orders on the Order Log (lined notebook paper). The Order Log's function is to remind the player when to check for acceptance and to give a concise listing of that order's acceptance variables. The log should include: order number, time sent, arrival time, sender, receiver, order, method, type, and order acceptance status. It should be a well-organized and efficient order record which can tell at a glance what orders are Accepted, Delayed, cancelled, or are on the way.

6.4.6 Order Delivery Restrictions

The Army Commander must stay in touch with his staff at the Army HQ to keep appraised of the battlefield situation. To be able to send aide-delivered orders (written or oral), the Army Commander must be stacked with the Army HQ at the start of the Command Phase. In-person orders can be issued by the Army Commander while away from the HQ, but between each such order, the Army Commander must return to his Army HQ. He does not have to end his movement with the Army HQ, "touching base" by simply moving through the hex with the HQ is enough.

6.4.7 Order Delivery Time

In-person orders are received the same turn they are sent. For aide-delivered orders, calculate the number of Movement Points a Commander would expend travelling between the Army Commander and the recipient. Divide this number by 10 and round up any fractions. The result is the number of turns the order will take in transit. Add this number of turns to the current turn to determine the time the order will arrive. The turn a new order arrives at the recipient, any pending orders (D4, D5, D6) are discarded, but previously accepted orders remain in place until the new order is accepted.

Sidebar

Remember that it is good form to write your orders in slighlty flowery and over-polite late 18th century prose. Use "My Dear..." a lot and do not be ashamed of speaking of yourself in third person.

Order Recipient (6.4) The recipient of an order is the staff of the recipient unit. To be more specific: Army HQ : The recipient is the HQ itself, and the Army Commander must issue the order In-person. The Army HQ is considered to have a Command Rating of 3 for this purpose. Corps : The recipient is the Corps HQ, UNLESS the Corps Commander is stacked with the Army Commander, in which case the Army Commander can deliver the order In-person. Regardless of the delivery method, use the corps Commander's Command Rating. The corps Commander must at least momentarily enter his corps HQ's hex before the order can be implemented. Upon accepting an order, the Commander must make his way to his HQ to implement it, no feet dragging is allowed. Division : The recipient is the Division Commander. Brigade : The recipient is the brigade itself, which is considered to have a Command Rating of 2 for this purpose.

The "touching base at HQ" requirement shows the commander's need to go to where all messengers go to check on what is happening outside of his own line of sight.

Note that these rules mercifully save you from one of a commander's hardest tasks in pre-radio days: keeping track of where people are - now and in two hours from now - and at the same time keeping these people informed of where you are and where you intentd to be in two hours.

Furthermore, it might upset some people that orders carried by mounted messengers travel at a meek 8 km/h. But this speed represents a good deal of back and forth- traffic a well as the fact that navigating a battlefield always takes more time than the armchair experts think.

6.5 Order Acceptance

The turn the order arrives at the recipient, an Acceptance Check is performed. Acceptance is a measure of how quickly the receiving Commander reacts to the new orders. To conduct an Acceptance Check consult the New Order Acceptance Table. Calculate the Acceptance Number according to the formula given at the top of the table. Locate the column on the table corresponding to the Acceptance Number and roll two dice as an 11..66 roll. The result is the order's acceptance state; record this on the Order Log. Do not forget that orders using conditions or stages (if... then, or when... then...) get the Complex modifier when checking for acceptance. The possible outcomes of this check are Accepted (A), Delayed (D4, D5 or D6), or Distorted (Dt).

6.5.1 Accepted

The order is instantly Accepted, and must be acted on from this turn on. (For corps orders, even if the order is instantly Accepted, it does not become implemented and usable until the receiving Corps Commander is in his HQ's hex.)

6.5.2 Delay

A delayed order is subject to some hesitation or preparation before action. Once delayed, an order becomes Accepted by rolling one die per turn. The Phasing Player makes this "Delay Reduction Roll" starting on the turn after the Acceptance Check produced the Delay result. Three types of delay are possible: D4, D5, and D6. To remove the Delay, one must roll equal to or greater than the number of the Delay. The turn the Delay is removed, the order is Accepted. Alternatively, Initiative or the receipt of another order can cancel a Delayed order. Resending the same order (by Initiative Orders or a normally issued order) to "improve" the acceptance result is NOT allowed.

6.5.3 Distortion

Distorted orders are completely misunderstood or ignored, and are discarded. Before the command that suffered a Distortion result can be issued another order, the Army Commander must "discover" the debacle. Roll a die for the command at the beginning of each friendly Command Phase following the Distortion result. On a roll of 5 or 6 the Army Commander realizes that his order has been misunderstood and may issue a new order to that command. The command suffering from this calamity can still roll for Initiative Orders (6.6.1).

6.6 Local Initiative

In addition to the order issuing procedure described above, Commanders on the spot can exercise Local Initiative. There are three types of Local Initiative: Initiative Orders, Default Defenses and Emergency Withdrawals. Initiative Orders require a die roll to succeed, Default Defenses and Emergency Withdrawals are automatic. Local Initiative is exercised in the Local Initiative Phase. A command can only use one of the three types of Local Initiative each turn.

6.6.1 Initiative Orders

Commanders can issue Initiative Orders to their commands or sub-units of their commands. The player handles Initiative Orders like any other, except that the acceptance procedure is different. 6.6.1.1 Corps Commanders, Divisional Commanders and cavalry brigades can attempt to issue Initiative Orders. Initiative Orders can be issued to the entire command, or to one of its sub-units. Army Commanders never issue Initiative Orders. Game-specific rules may limit or expand this capability. 6.6.1.2 In one turn, only one Commander can attempt Initiative for a given command, or one of its sub-units. Therefore, if a Divisional Commander rolls for Initiative and fails, the Corps Commander can roll only for one of his other divisions, and not the parent corps.

6.6.1.3 Getting Initiative

Determine the Commander's Command Rating. Independent brigades are considered to have a Command Rating of 2. Use this to determine which column to use on the Initiative Table. Roll two dice as an 11..66 roll. The table provides ranges that result in Initiative or Loose Cannon. If a die-roll does not fall in one of these ranges, nothing happens. If a command becomes a Loose Cannon, see 6.6.1.6 below.

6.6.1.4 Effects of Initiative

When a command successfully gets Initiative, immediately write a new order for it. The order does not cost Command Points to create, does not need to be delivered, and will be automatically Accepted in the upcoming New Order Acceptance Phase. Corps Commanders must still make a trip to their HQ to implement these orders. Any orders currently Accepted or in Delay are discarded. An aide-delivered order in transit that will arrive in a future turn will still do so, but orders arriving in the same Orders Phase are discarded.

Sidebar

Order Writing Example You have the 3rd Division in Hall and you would very much like it to defend Kümla village instead. A simple order would then go something like: "3rd Div: march to Kümla and defend."

If you like you can develop this further: "3rd Div: march over Hinzeberg to Kümla and defend." "3rd Div: march to Kümla and defend it from attacks from the north."

You can add a condition or an alternative: "3rd Div: march to Kümla the instant 4th Division arrives at your location." "3rd Div: march to Kümla and defend. If the enemy holds Kümla stop in Kirseberg and defend the bridge there." (Both these orders are Complex.)

If you feel more aggressive try telling 2nd Division to capture Hall. Like this: "2nd Div: capture Hall." "2nd Div: attack and capture Hall from the direction of Säter." "2nd Div: attack up the Säter road and capture Hall." (These are all Engage orders.)

Or you can be even more pretentious: "2nd Div: march over Hinzeberg to Viskan Stream. Cross the stream and capture Hall." "2nd Div: capture Hall and then deploy to defend against attacks from the east." "2nd Div: cross Viskan and capture Hall. Continue your attack up the Hinseberg road and if possible capture Säter. " (All these orders are Complex. In the first case you will only begin checking for Attack Stoppage once the actual attack begins.)

It is convenient to precede any order with a brief code of your own design for arrival time, order type & delivery method.

See 30.0 for more on this subject.

Initiative represent local commander trying to run things themselves. This might be a good thing if the "local commander" is someone like Davout, but most of the time he will be elsewhere and you will be coping with a lot of wasted time and things happening that you did not want to happen. You will soon realize that the best way to save you the risks of over-creative underlings and avoid the lottery of rolling for initiative and risking loose canon results is to either make sure that nobody tries to do anything OR to take command and give good orders.

6.6.1.5 Initiative-Based Orders

Like any other order, players must record and faithfully follow Initiative-based orders. Initiative cannot be used to re-issue orders which have not yet arrived or which are in a delay status—only for different orders. Any attempt to consciously circumvent this is cheating.

6.6.1.6 Loose Cannon

If a command rolls for Initiative Orders and the result falls into the Loose Cannon range, the opposing player must issue an order to the affected command for them to move and/or attack for one turn (only). After this one turn, the unit enters No Orders Status. The owning player conducts the actual movement, but must follow the order issued by the enemy. This order cancels any orders the command might have had. The movement can be an attack, withdrawal, or any other type of activity. The command suffering under a Loose Cannon is not required to wreck itself in futile Close Combats, etc., but a reasonable effort should be made to follow the orders.

6.6.2 Default Defense

A formation currently under orders may throw away its order and instead adopt a "Defend in Place" order. This is automatically successful, and does not require an Initiative roll. The order requires, however, that the command hub of the Command (Corps HQ, Divisional Commander or brigade) is frozen in place in the hex it is currently in. To move, it requires new orders or an Emergency Withdrawal. 6.6.2.1 Units in No Orders Status (6.3.4) can not adopt a Default Defense. 6.6.2.2 Any current orders or orders awaiting acceptance are discarded by a Default Defense. An aide-delivered order in transit that will arrive in a future turn will still do so. 6.6.2.3 A unit moving under General Orders that comes into contact with the enemy (6.3.2) or a unit that can be considered to have finished its current orders must either adopt a Default Defense or enter No Orders Status (6.3.4).

6.6.3 Emergency Withdrawal

A command can, regardless of its orders status, execute an Emergency Withdrawal, thereby cancelling its current orders and causing it to fall back. The command must be under a threat of being decimated or destroyed, due to being under heavy attack, about to be surrounded or attacking into murderous fire. The judgment of when this is appropriate is in the owning player's hands. A command might also be forced to execute an Emergency Withdrawal. 6.6.3.1 Units executing an Emergency Withdrawal immediately accept an order lasting one turn to withdraw away from the threat. 6.6.3.2 During the Movement Phase, the Commander of the withdrawing command (or Corps HQ for a corps) must withdraw at least 6 hexes, but can move up to its full Movement Allowance if the owning player wishes. 6.6.3.3 Units in the command must try to get back within Command Range (remember command radii will be halved since the command enters No Orders Status after an Emergency Withdrawal). Units out of Command Range cannot remain in place per 6.11.4. 6.6.3.4 A brigade on Independent Orders simply withdraws its full Movement Allowance. 6.6.3.5 The direction of an Emergency Withdrawal is not affected by the standard Retreat rules (21.4) since it is a voluntary movement. The withdrawing command must do its best to try to get away from the threat that caused the withdrawal, however. 6.6.3.6 At the conclusion of the move, all infantry units of the withdrawing command must make a Morale Check (21.2). A failed check means the unit takes one Straggler. 6.6.3.7 Upon completion of this (one turn) movement, the command enters No Orders Status (6.3.4). Any orders it had (Accepted or in Delay) when the Withdrawal was called for are lost. An aide-delivered order due to arrive that turn is also lost, but an order in transit that will arrive in a future turn will still do so. 6.6.3.8 Further Emergency Withdrawals can be conducted if the command's safety is again threatened, with repeated Straggler checks being the only penalty. 6.6.3.9 A command that fails its Attack Stoppage roll (6.7) must execute an involuntary Emergency Withdrawal. 6.6.3.10 A corps that has its HQ overrun has an Emergency Withdrawal forced upon it.

6.7 Attack Stoppage

Attack Stoppage represents an attack's failure in the attacking Commander's mind. He is, much more than the player, reluctant to push the attack to the last man. 6.7.1 If a command will execute Engage Orders during the current turn, it must make an Attack Stoppage check in the Command Phase. Check for Attack Stoppage for the command executing the order as a whole, not for each sub-unit (example: if a corps has an order to attack, the corps checks for stoppage, not each subordinate division). A player can never voluntarily fail an Attack Stoppage roll.

Sidebar

While these rules will leave it to you, the player, to mass things up at the top, loose cannon results represent the help you just might get from your subordinates as they try to think for themselves.

When they happen in the game loose cannon results may be hard to explain and rationalize and "he would never do such a stupid thing anyway". But rest assured that even careful and rock-solid officers such as Wellington and Davout did get things wrong from time to time.

A good order can answer four questions. WHEN and WHERE is WHOM supposed to do WHAT. If your order can - at least in your own mind - answer the question WHY as well, you are pretty much in business.

Yes, the withdrawal can be half a map along a Road.

Example: A corps composed of 3 divisions is under an Engage Order. In the Command Phase, the owning player has to check for Attack Stoppage. He checks the Attack Stoppage table: the corps has 3 sub-units (divisions) one of which is wrecked.

The first table gives us a 2. That is the row to use on the second table. And the rating of the Corps Commander gives the column. (The Corps Commander rating is 4.)

The final result is 5. The player now rolls two dice and has to roll at least a 5, else a Corps Attack Stoppage will happen.

6.7.2 Procedure

Consult the Attack Stoppage Table. Cross index the number of Wrecked (21.6) sub-units in the command against the total number of sub-units currently in it (i.e. count attached units, but not units under Independent Orders). This number indicates the row to use on the smaller table. Cross index this number with the force Commander's Command Rating (independent brigades have a Command Rating of 2). The number found is the minimum roll on two dice needed to pass the check. If the command passes the check, it continues to attack. If it fails, the command must stop the attack and execute an Emergency Withdrawal (6.6.3).

6.7.3 Divisions and brigades of a corps operating on the map before the arrival of their Corps HQ make Corps Attack Stoppage checks as a corps, except that corps size is determined using only those sub-units actually on the map. A reinforcing command that has yet to enter the map never has to roll for Attack Stoppage, regardless of its orders.

6.8 Independent Orders

A sub-unit of a larger command may be given an Independent Order. An Independent Order is a separate set of instructions for that sub-unit that detaches it from its parent command, making that sub-unit a command of its own. Once the sub-unit is detached, it is free from any Command Range restrictions (6.11) of its former parent command. 6.8.1 Divisions belonging to a corps, and brigades not otherwise belonging to a division, can be given Independent Orders this way. In addition, cavalry brigades can be given Independent Orders even if they do belong to a division. Unless specified in the game specific rules, other sub-units may not be given Independent Orders. 6.8.2 An Independent Order is written down exactly as a normal order, directed specifically at a sub-unit of a command. A sub-unit receiving Independent Orders is considered a separate command from the moment the order is accepted, following its own orders. It is unaffected by orders given to its former parent command and vice versa. It checks for Attack Stoppage, makes Emergency Withdrawals, etc, on its own. The only way it can rejoin its parent command is by Sub-unit transfer (6.9). 6.8.3 A sub-unit can receive Independent Orders either by normal orders or Initiative. Normal orders can be issued directly from the Army Commander or as part of an order issued to its parent command. Such orders must go through the normal acceptance procedure, and until implemented the sub-unit remains under the orders of its parent command. Initiative orders are implemented immediately as usual. Sub-units can roll for Initiative themselves or have a superior Commander (Corps Commander for divisions, Corps or Division Commander for brigades) roll for Initiative to give them Independent Orders.

6.9 Sub-Unit Transfers

Sub-units may be transferred between commands. (Sub unit? See box to the right.) Divisions or brigades can be transferred between corps, brigades between divisions, or independent units could be transferred to a parent command. Only sub-units that start independent, or would otherwise be allowed to receive Independent Orders are allowed to transfer. To transfer a sub-unit, an order must be issued (by the Army Commander or by Initiative) to the sub-unit being transferred, stating simply what command it is to join. When the order is implemented, the sub-unit is considered to have orders to move to its new parent formation. Once within the Command Range of its new commander, the formation functions normally as a sub-unit of the new parent command (division of a corps, brigade of a division etc.) to which it is assigned.

Sidebar

Note : Due to the fact that Acceptance comes after the Attack Stoppage check in the sequence, a command never checks for stoppage the first turn under new orders.

It is perfectly legal to give each division of a corps separate instructions and axis of advance WITHOUT these divisions becoming independent commands. Sub- units with special instructions, but without Independent Orders, would still be part of their parent corps and would have to trace command to the corps HQ as usual. If a sub- unit receives an Independent Order as part of an order to its parent command, this should be clearly stated in the order.

Sub-Unit Definitions (6.7) Corps : Each division (and brigade not otherwise belonging to a division) counts as one sub-unit. The original Corps Commander, if killed, wounded, or reassigned to a higher command during the game, counts as an additional Wrecked sub-unit. Division : Each brigade counts as a sub-unit. If the Divisional Commander is killed, wounded or reassigned to a higher command, he counts as an additional Wrecked sub-unit for that order only. Once the Division suffers Attack Stoppage or receives new orders, the replacement Commander is treated as being the "original" division Commander for all purposes. Brigade : A brigade is considered to have only one sub-unit (itself), and if Wrecked counts as having 1 of 1 units Wrecked. Artillery is never counted for sub-unit calculations.

6.10 HQ Units

HQ units represent the staff of a corps or army. They have the same movement characteristics as Commanders, do not count for stacking, can not be targeted for fire, and remain unaffected by morale results. HQs in a stack which retreats can do so with it at the owning player's discretion. Divisions and independent brigades do not have HQs.

6.10.1 HQ Movement

HQs without specific orders to move are "bolted to the ground". They remain in their hex unless ordered to move, retreat or are overrun. Corps HQ movement is dependent on their corps' orders. If a corps has orders to move, the HQ can move freely within the limits of them, otherwise the Corps HQ must remain in its hex. An Army HQ needs a specific order directed to it to move. A move order to an Army HQ must be issued In-person, and is considered a General Order (The HQ has a Command Rating of 3.). Written orders cannot be issued from a moving Army HQ until it arrives at its final destination, but otherwise it functions normally.

6.10.2 HQ overrun

Corps HQs which are not stacked with one or more Combat Units and have enemy units enter their hex displace to the nearest friendly stack. In the following turn, the entire command must execute an Emergency Withdrawal. An Army HQs that is overrun must withdraw at least 6 hexes, but can move up to its full Movement Allowance if the owning player wishes, and it loses any order it had to move awaiting acceptance. This does not cause an Emergency Withdrawal to the army, just embarrassment.

6.11 Sub-Unit Command and Control

Sub-units of a command must generally remain within the Command Range of their Division Commander and/or Corps HQ. Units within these ranges are In Command, units outside are Out of Command. A unit which is In Command can move and fight as desired within the spirit of their orders.

6.11.1 Command Range

Command radius is checked at the end of the Movement Phase. During the Movement Phase, all Commanders and units of a formation must move so that they end up within these ranges (with the exception noted in 6.11.4). Calculate Command Range distances in hexes. Steep Slope, Woods and Swamp hexes count as two hexes, unless negated by Roads. See box to the right for exact ranges. 6.11.2 Units are always In Command if in the same hex or adjacent to their Commander unless separated by an impassable hexside of some kind. 6.11.3 If a command is in No Orders Status, all Command Ranges are halved. Command Ranges are also different at night (27.2.1). 6.11.4 A unit that is not in command at the start of its movement must either spend all its Movement Points trying to get back into Command Range or remain in place during the entire Movement Phase. The choice can change from turn to turn, but must be within the guidelines of the unit's current orders. If moving, the unit has to take the shortest route, but not the fastest formation to get back within range. There is no requirement to form March Column and turn your rear to the enemy when a Line Backstep would be safer. 6.11.5 Cavalry units can violate the rules for Command Range when executing a Cavalry Charge. See 16.1.5 for the details. 6.11.6 Artillery units Out of Command may only Opportunity Fire, they may not conduct Fire Combat in the Fire Combat Phases.

If you find this easier to remember, trace the range in Commander MPs, counting Roads as 1 instead of 1⁄2. The result is the same

Sidebar

In this day and age staff organizations were not the least set. A staff could be anything from the commander's best drinking buddy and a couple of orderlies to a small movable town complete with cooks and grooms and mistresses as well as portable libraries and a semaphore station. Napoleon's Imperial HQ was a large apparatus, but it was dwarfed by the massive affair that travelled on Schwartzenberg's heels in 1813 that included a couple of royal courts and half the blue bloods in Europe.

Corps Commander with two Divisions.

Command Ranges (6.11.1) The distances allowed for Command Range depend on the echelon of commands involved. Brigade: Brigades belonging to a division must be within 4 hexes of their Divisional Commander. For a brigade with Line Extensions, only one hex of the brigade line must be within range. Brigades attached directly to a corps without belonging to a division must be within 8 hexes of the Corps HQ. Division: Commanders of divisions belonging to a corps must be within 8 hexes of the Corps HQ. This means the Command Range could extend 8 hexes between a Corps HQ and a Divisional Commander and then a further 4 hexes to a brigade from that Divisional Commander. Artillery: Artillery units assigned to a division must be within 4 hexes of that Divisional Commander. Artillery belonging to a corps must be either within 4 hexes of any Division Commander of that corps, or within 8 hexes of the Corps HQ. Artillery assigned directly to an army must be within 4 hexes of any Division Commander of the army, within 8 hexes of any Corps HQ, or within 8 hexes of the Army HQ.

7.0 Unit Sizes

Infantry and cavalry units measure their size in strength levels, ranging from C (smallest) to AAA. Artillery units measure their size in gun points ranging from 1 to 5. Skirmishers are either full or reduced strength. Commanders and HQs do not worry about size.

7.1 Infantry and Cavalry Strength Levels

Infantry and cavalry unit size is measured in levels of A, B and C. An A level unit has roughly 1500 men if infantry or 1000 men if cavalry. Strength level B is half the size of strength level A and strength level C is half the size of strength level B. Above strength level A, a unit can be AB, AA, AAB and AAA (the largest). The Strength level can be considered the "significant digit" of unit size, the exact size is kept track of on the Loss Charts. To the left of each set of squares is the unit's current strength level. 7.1.1 One A=2Bs, one B=2Cs and one A=4Cs. Therefore, a strength level AB unit with Line Extensions in two different hexes would have a B in each of the three occupied hexes. Also, a stack of two strength level B units would have a total strength of A. Note that a B strength and a C strength unit stacked together still has a total strength of B, since there is no intermediate strength between A and B. 7.1.2 Those who wish may use strength level markers to mark strength levels under the unit counter when units are below A strength level—any unit without a strength level marker is assumed to be at least A strength level. The strength level markers, marked B and C, serve a function similar to numeric step markers used in other games. The current strength level can also be found on the Loss Charts. 7.1.3 A unit's starting full strength appears on its counter. In some games, specific scenarios may call for units to start with reduced strengths. In those cases, find the unit's starting strength on the Loss Charts after marking off the indicated Permanent Casualties and/or Stragglers.

7.2 Artillery Gun Points

Artillery units measure their size in gun points, each point representing roughly 3 guns (depending on calibre). An artillery unit can have from 1 to 5 gun points. The full strength of an artillery unit is printed on its counter. If the strength is reduced from combat or detached batteries, mark it with a gun point marker equal to the number of gun points remaining in the unit.

7.3 Skirmisher Strength

Skirmisher units have two strength levels, full and reduced. The front side of a Skirmisher shows it at full strength, the back at reduced strength.

7.4 Comparing Size

Close Combat and Cavalry Charges require that you compare the size of the attacker and the defender. Use the strength levels, not the actual number of boxes on the Loss Charts when comparing, so that a strength AB unit is bigger than a strength A unit, and a strength AA unit is twice as big as a strength A unit. Stacks are added together as per 7.1.1. Artillery (any size) and Skirmishers (both full and reduced), or any combination of these stacked together, are considered to be size C.

8.0 Formations

Combat units can have different formations, each with its own unique advantages and disadvantages. Terrain movement costs and combat characteristics are different for the various formations. The various charts give the specifics.

8.1 Available Formations

No unit can ever be in more than one formation at a time, see the box to the right. Most formations are shown by the facing side of the counter (Column vs. Line, Limbered vs. Unlimbered, Ready vs. Blown, etc.). Some formations, such as Square and Routed, require an additional marker to designate them.

8.2 Changing Formation

Units normally change formation by spending the required Movement Points to do so during the Movement Phase. Formation Change costs are given on the Movement Cost Chart. 8.2.1 Formation Changes can trigger Opportunity Fire (17.4). While technically Formation Changes, rallying a Routed unit to Disorganized status, recovering a Blown cavalry unit to Ready formation, or having a Square change formation in Close Combat does not trigger Opportunity Fire.

Sidebar

S trength levels are relevant in close combat, where there is a modifier for being double the size of your opponent: every other strength level is (at least) twice the size of a C unit, any strength level that starts with an A is (at least) twice the size of a B unit. AAA, AAB and AA units are (at least) twice the size of an A unit, and only AAA units are twice the size of an AB unit. Got it?

Available Formations (8.1) Infantry units can adopt Line, March Column, Combat Column, and Square formations. Skirmish units are always in "Skirmish" formation (except when Routed). Cavalry is either in Ready or Blown formation. Artillery can be in Limbered or Unlimbered formation. All of these unit types can be in Routed formation, which is also a Morale State (21.1).

8.2.2 When a unit changes formation, it must normally retain its facing. Limbering and Unlimbering artillery can freely rotate facing 180 degrees at no additional MP cost. Units with all-around frontal or rear facing (Squares and Routed units) can choose any facing when they enter a formation where they no longer have all-around facing. 8.2.3 A unit in Line with Line Extensions (13.0) that wishes to change formation to Column must retract its extensions before it can change formation.

8.3 Squares

Infantry units can form Squares to protect themselves against cavalry. Only infantry units in Line or Column, and their extensions can form Square. Line Extensions form Square independently of their parent. All infantry units in a stack must enter Square if one wishes to do so.

8.3.1 Entering Square

Units can enter Square formation when they are in the target hex of a Cavalry Charge (regular or Reaction), or as a regular Formation Change during movement. 8.3.1.1 Infantry units entering Square as part of movement spend the MP cost for a Formation Change as usual. Units forming Square in a Cavalry Charge do so automatically, without spending any MP, but this ends the units move. 8.3.1.2 DG and Routed units cannot form Square, but units can stay in Square if they become DG while in Square. Squares that become Routed of course enter Routed formation instead.

8.3.2 Square Movement

Units in Square formation can move a single hex in any direction if they start the Movement Phase in Square, but must pass a Morale Check (21.2) to do so. If the stack passes the check, move it one hex. If the stack fails the check, the units attempting to move becomes DG and enters Column formation. A unit moving this way is considered to have spent all its Movement Points, and can not move further. This movement can only be into Clear terrain and may never be used to enter Close Combat.

8.3.3 Exiting Square

Units can voluntarily exit Square formation during movement by making a normal Formation Change. 8.3.4 A unit in Square that is attacked in Close Combat automatically changes formation to Column (or Line in the case of a unit with Line Extensions) and has its Morale State reduced 1 level. See 15.4.5 for the details.

8.4 Combat and March Columns

There are two different types of Column formation in the game, March Columns and Combat Columns. March Columns are severely handicapped in Close Combat, while Combat Columns offer some combat advantages compared to Lines. Some nations use March Columns, while others use Combat Columns instead. No units may use both formations, it is either/or. The game specific rules will list which units use Combat Columns, all others use March Columns. 8.4.1 When a rule refers only to Column, it applies equally to Combat and March Columns. A unit in Column formation, is always considered to be in the type of Column its nationality uses. Exception 1 : Units in Combat Column that move across a Bridge directly into Close Combat are considered to be in March Column during Close Combat. A unit in Combat Column that has just crossed a Bridge is considered to be in March Column for the purpose of Cavalry Reaction Charges. Exception 2 : In Village Fighting March Columns are treated as Combat Columns, see 19.4. 8.4.2 If a March Column is the leading unit in Close Combat or Cavalry Charge, the opponent ignores any Permanent Casualties or Stragglers resulting from the combat, only the morale result is implemented. Units in March Column can still initiate Close Combat, but this is recommended only as a desperate measure (getting across a defended Bridge, for example).

Sidebar

Contrary to what some wargames might make you believe, squares did move on the battlefield. Moving such a massive block of people around was not done while under attack and with one side of the square moving backwards like some surreal 1600- legged crab. Instead everybody faced in the same direction amd moved a short distances between halts for dressing the ranks.

OLDER GAMES Austerlitz & Marengo : Only French units use Combat Column. Aspern-Essling: The French use Combat Column. The Austrians use Combat Column, but Austrian units in Combat Column have 7 MPs instead of 8, except when using Road Movement (this rule replaces the Massed Column rule in the game specific rules). Don't keep track of fractional MPs when changing formation, simply keep moving until you've used the maximum for the formation you are currently in.

9.0 Stacking

Stacking is placing more than one unit in a hex. Stacking primarily effects which unit takes losses first in combat. Stacks can be rearranged at any time during a player's Movement Phase. 9.1 No more than three A strength levels, 10 gun points, and one full strength Skirmisher can be in a hex at one time. The stacking limits apply to each category separately. Stacking limits are checked at the end of any phase in which movement or retreats are possible. Units may temporarily over-stack during movement. During the conduct of Close Combat and Cavalry Charges, each side can stack up to the stacking limit in the hex. 9.2 If an over-stacked hex is discovered, the stack has its Morale State reduced by 1. Over- stacked hexes must be broken up in the next available friendly Movement Phase. Routed units may move one hex to accomplish this. Repeat as needed. 9.3 Units may move as a stack as long as each unit's Movement Allowance is not exceeded. MP spent remain independent for each unit in a stack. Stacking and unstacking have no effect on movement or MP costs, except for Road Movement (12.5). 9.4 Stacks can have but one Morale State marked with a morale marker atop of it. When units in different Morale States stack at the end of movement or retreat, they adopt the worst Morale State of the new stack.

10.0 Facing

All units must be aligned to "face" a hex corner. All units in a hex must face the same direction, with the exception of units with all-around frontal or rear facing. Facing defines the unit's front, flank and rear, which affects movement and combat. See the box to the right.

10.1 Changing Facing

10.1.1 During movement, units must pay 1 MP to change facing from one corner to an adjacent corner. 10.1.2 A unit (any type or formation) can rotate 180 degrees at the cost of 1 MP. 10.1.3 Facing can be changed at will at the end of any required retreat with no MP cost. Units of both players executing a Close Combat or a Cavalry Charge can change facing freely at the end of that action. 10.1.4 Units with all-around frontal facing never spend MPs to change facing. Lines entering a Town/Village hex change to all-around frontal facing without paying any MPs to do so (it's included in the MP cost for the terrain). Lines exiting such hexes face in the direction they moved.

11.0 Zones of Influence

Infantry units (only) exert a Zone of Influence (or ZoI) into hexes adjacent to their frontal hexsides. In these hexes, they have a limited ability to affect enemy operations beyond the level represented by Close Combat. Cavalry and artillery units have their own way of reacting to enemy movement within 3 hexes. See Reaction Charges (16.5) and Opportunity Fire (17.4).

11.1 Limits to ZoI

Zones of Influence do not extend into or across Prohibited terrain, into Fortified Terrain, into Town/Village hexes or into hexes occupied by other friendly units.

11.2 Lack of ZoI

Infantry units in March Column, Disorganized and Routed units do not have a ZoI.

11.3 Morale Degradation

A unit trying to conduct operations in an enemy Zone of Influence can have its Morale State reduced. 11.3.1 Morale Degradation occurs when

A unit attempts to move directly from one enemy Zone of Influence hex to another.
A unit changes formation in a Zone of Influence (including Square formation in reaction to a Cavalry Charge).
A unit retreats from one ZoI hex directly into another. 11.3.2 A unit suffering Morale Degradation has its Morale State lowered by one (Blood- Lusted units become Normal, Normal units become Shaken etc). If this causes a moving unit to become DG, it has its remaining Movement Points halved. If the moving unit Routs, its movement stops, and it is retreated per 21.4.

11.4 Rally

Units in an enemy ZoI are not allowed to Rally (21.5).

Sidebar

Note : infantry and cavalry can stack freely.

This means that you can crowd 4500 soldiers thirty guns with teams, crews, limbers and back-up wagons as well as another 100-200 riflemen with cool hats into one 200 x 200 meter square. It will not be practical, but it will work. Sort of.

Facings (10.0) The following units have the standard facing: Line Column, Cavalry (Ready and Blown), Artillery (Limbered as well as Unlimbered). all-around frontal facing: Infantry in Line in a Town/Village hex, Skirmishers, Squares. all-around rear facing: Routed units. no facing: Commanders,HQs.

1 MP

Zone of Influence Front Front 1 MP

Flank Flank

Rear Rear

The ZoI represents rolling volleys and similar techniques used by infantry, as well as the threat of an attack. It is not that much to worry about, but you want to keep your distance just to be safe. There was no such thing as "pinning" or "suppressing" infantry fire during this period. To "pin" formed infantry - keeping it busy -you had to charge it.

12.0 Movement

During each Movement Phase, the Phasing Player may move his units. Each unit is moved individually or as part of a stack keeping track of each units remaining MP. Movement must follow a contiguous path through the hex grid, one hex at a time.

12.1 How to Move Units

The Phasing Player can move all, some, or none of his units as desired. 12.1.1 U nits can only enter frontal hexes during movement. Units with all-around frontal facing can enter any hex, and pay the normal MP cost to do so. (Exception: Squares can only move a single hex. See 8.3.2.) 12.1.2 Use Movement Points to calculate movement. Each unit expends MPs for each hex entered or hexside crossed according to the Movement Table. Keep a running total of the Movement Points a unit expends while moving. If a unit becomes Disorganized for whatever reason during movement, halve the remaining Movement Points. 12.1.3 Each unit has a Movement Allowance, based on unit type and formation, given on the Movement Table. This is the number of Movement Points the unit may spend in the Movement Phase. 12.1.4 Movement Allowances are completely independent for each unit and expenditures by one unit do not affect others. Movement points cannot be saved for future use. 12.1.5 A unit that has not spent any Movement Points this Movement Phase, but still has insufficient Movement Points to enter an adjacent hex, can always move one hex (unless it is Unlimbered artillery or Routed). This move may not be into or through Prohibited terrain and uses up the entire Movement Allowance of the unit. A unit moving this way reduces its Morale State by 1 (Normal to Shaken etc). Units can enter Close Combat this way.

12.2 Terrain Effects on Movement

As per the Movement Table, each hex and hexside feature in the game costs a varying number of Movement Points to enter or cross. A moving unit must pay the total cost unless using the "one hex movement" exception in 12.1.5. 12.2.1 A hexside feature that must be crossed adds its cost to that of the hex being entered. 12.2.2 Units cannot enter or cross Prohibited hexes or hexsides. 12.2.3 Forest hexes affect movement if they contain forest symbols in any part of the hex. 12.2.4 No unit can move, charge or retreat out of terrain it would not be able to move or charge into. For example, a cavalry unit cannot enter a Swamp hex by Road and then move/ charge out of that hex "off-road" through the swampy hex-edges. 12.2.5 Some terrain types can cause a unit to become Shaken or Disorganized as indicated on the Movement Table. These results are only implemented if the unit is currently in a better Morale State. If at the same or worse Morale State, the result has no additional effect. If such movement would cause a unit to also suffer a Morale Degradation (for example when moving across a Tributary while moving in a ZoI) implement the Morale Degradation first. 12.2.6 The number of elevation levels in a hex determines the steepness of a Slope. A hex with two elevation levels is a Slope. A hex with three elevation levels is a Moderate Slope hex. A hex with four elevation levels is a Steep Slope. A hex with five elevation levels is an Impassable Slope - Prohibited terrain. Terrain cost for Slopes is in addition to other terrain costs, and is paid regardless of which direction the unit entered the hex from.

12.3 Restrictions on Movement

12.3.1 Units may not enter enemy-occupied hexes except to resolve Close Combats (15.1.4) or Cavalry Charges (16.1). 12.3.2 Only friendly units may move during the friendly Movement Phase. Enemy units could be forced to retreat as a combat result or might conduct a Reaction Charge; this is not movement per se. 12.3.3 A unit or stack cannot move into a hex if it does not have enough MPs to reface the same direction as the rest of the units there. The player must reface the final stack so as to make sure all units face the same way. Units with all-around frontal facing are ignored for this rule. Rule 12.1.5 can be used to reface in case there isn't enough MPs for the move and reface. 12.3.4 Unless otherwise specified in the game specific rules, units cannot exit the game map. Infantry units forced to exit the map have all their remaining strength boxes on the Loss Charts marked off as Stragglers. Other units are eliminated. 12.3.5 Unlimbered batteries cannot move, but can expend MPs to change formation or facing. 12.3.6 Routed units have a Movement Allowance of zero, and can only move by retreating.

Sidebar

Infantry in column take to the hills.

Note : Cavalry units can expend their entire MA and still complete a three-hex Cavalry Charge.

OLDER GAMES Austerlitz uses a different, "layer cake" model for portraying elevation. Elevation changes, Slopes and Steep Slopes are marked hexside features. Pay the cost for crossing the hexside, in addition to the hex terrain. Always use the worst type of terrain in case a hexside is both an elevation change and a Slope.

If you think it's strange that moving sideways along a hillside is as expensive as moving uphill, remember that these units move in huge formations, and keeping the formation while moving sideways on a slope is even harder than going up- or downhill. Furthermore it might be worth noting - just for comparison - that a Steep Slope hex would be hard to cross even with a modern four-wheel drive car or a tracked vehicle.

12.4 Special Movement Types

12.4.1 Line Backstep

Infantry units in Line formation can "backstep" into any adjacent hex (including flank or rear) without changing facing, but this requires their entire Movement Allowance. This can not be combined with 12.1.5 (sorry, no backing into Close Combat).

12.4.2 Square Movement

Units in Square formation can move a single hex, See 8.3.2.

12.5 Road Movement

Units can gain movement benefits using Roads, though the necessity of maintaining combat formation in the vicinity of the enemy makes the benefits less than you might expect. 12.5.1 A unit uses Road Movement by following the Road's path. The unit pays the Road movement cost and ignores the MP cost of other features in the hex or hexside crossed. Facing change costs are ignored during Road Movement. 12.5.2 To use Road Movement, one of the unit's frontal hexes must face a hex side the Road goes through. When a unit wishes to begin Road Movement, it must spend MPs to face toward the next hex along the Road if it is not already doing so. When the unit finishes moving along a Road (either because it is finished moving or beginning off-road movement), automatically face the unit with one of its frontal hexes towards the next hex along the Road. 12.5.3 Units cannot use Road Movement to enter hexes containing infantry, cavalry, artillery units or wagons, they have to move off-road to do so. In addition, road moving units cannot move stacked with other units of these types. 12.5.4 Infantry units must be in Column to use Road Movement. 12.5.5 A unit cannot enter Close Combat or execute Cavalry Charges while it is using Road Movement.

12.5.6 Forced March

Forced March is a method of increasing unit speeds while using Road Movement; the cost is potential Stragglers. 12.5.6.1 Only infantry in Column and not Disorganized can Force March. Units performing Forced March must use Road Movement while doing so. 12.5.6.2 For one set of three (3) extra Movement Points, make a Morale Check (21.2). A failed check means the unit suffers a Straggler. 12.5.6.3 To gain a second set of three MPs, make a check for Stragglers as per above again. No unit may gain more than a total of six MPs using Forced March. 12.5.6.4 Skirmishers stacked with Forced Marching infantry units can move along the entire distance and remain stacked, even if this would exceed the Skirmisher's Movement Allowance. The Skirmishers must stay with the infantry unit for the entire movement to do this. The Skirmisher does not suffer any penalties for tagging along with a Forced March.

12.6 Reinforcements

Reinforcements arrive at the time and Entry Hexes listed in the arrival schedule during a player's Movement Phase. Players cannot delay, ignore, or redirect reinforcements in any way. They can arrive in any formation. 12.6.1 Move reinforcements onto the map as if they were in a long column extending off the map from the Entry Hex. This means each successive unit entering the map has fewer MPs left to use than the one before it. Sometimes, it may take more than a single turn to enter a reinforcing column. 12.6.2 If enemy units block a specified Entry Hex, that unit is free to enter at any hex free of enemy units at or within 10 hexes of the scheduled Entry Hex along any map edge. 12.6.3 If a unit belonging to a larger formation is coming on as a reinforcement, it must maintain its current orders until it is within the Command Range of its parent formation— unless the orders are changed using Initiative or an order is Accepted from the Army Commander.

Sidebar

Infantry & cavalry does not move at "double road speed" because the roads are not wide enough for all the traffic you would like to use it for. Most of the time guns, ammunition carts and ambulances will monopolize the roads and tracks with the combat arms either marching parallel to the road or on it mixed up with the rest of the traffic.

Example: An infantry unit in line enters a clear hex featuring a road (cost 2 MP). As the player wishes to use the road he changes the unit's formation into column (1 MP, total 3 MP) and turns the unit to face down the road (1 MP, total 3 MP). The unit can now spend 4 MP on road movement.

Two skills was prized above all else in 19th century elite infantry. First and foremost was of course battlefield "steadfastness", the ability to stand absolutely still while being hammered by artillery. The second was the ability to make long (40 km) marches for days on end without losing any stragglers.

Infantry in column take the main road.

13.0 Line Extensions

Line Extensions enable large infantry units in Line formation to cover a greater area by deploying battalions into adjacent hexes. Line Extension markers literally move out from their parent unit (or back again). Line Extensions behave exactly as any other combat unit except that at the end of every phase they must be adjacent to their parent with their arrow identifying the parent if possible.

13.1 General Rules

13.1.1 Line Extensions have the same movement, morale, rally, combat and target characteristics as any other unit. A Line Extension has the same Morale Rating and Wrecked status as its parent. As long as both players understand which Line Extension belongs to which parent, the "arrow restriction" does not affect the facing of a Line Extension in any way. 13.1.2 When created, Line Extensions begin with the same facing, remaining Movement Points, and Morale State as their parent. After their creation, however, they keep track of these independently.

13.1.3 Generating Line Extensions

Line Extensions can be generated at any time during movement, as long as the parent unit has sufficient Movement Points left to do so. Place the Line Extension in a hex adjacent to the parent unit, facing the same direction, and spend 1 MP for both the parent and extension. The extension must also spend the MP cost of the hex the extension is placed in and any hexside terrain cost between it and the parent unit's hex. This is considered movement by the Line Extension for all purposes (such as Morale Degradation in a ZoI, Reaction Charges and rule 12.1.5).

13.1.4 Removing Line Extensions

At any time during movement, a Line Extension can be removed by paying the cost of the parent unit's hex (plus the cost of any hexside terrain between the parent and Line Extension) +1 MP. If the extension had fewer MPs left than the parent, use the Line Extension's remaining MPs for the parent. Two Line Extensions may rejoin the same parent unit simultaneously for this +1MP cost. If the parent and extension are in the same hex, do not pay any terrain cost, only the +1 MP.

13.2 Restrictions on Line Extensions

Only infantry units in Line formation with at least a B strength level can generate Line Extensions. Skirmisher, cavalry, and artillery units cannot generate Line Extensions. Large units (A size or greater) can generate two Line Extensions. No unit can ever have more than two Line Extensions. Line Extension markers can never stack with other Line Extensions. Strength levels must be evenly divided between the parent and Line Extensions—with any excess in the parent's hex. An Extension must be at least of C strength. 13.2.1 A Line Extension can never be in Column formation and the parent unit can never change formation to Column while it has Line Extensions. Line Extensions CAN form Square as a reaction to Cavalry Charges.

13.3 Effects of Line Extensions

13.3.1 Morale results affect only the parent or Line Extension actually taking the result. Exception - If any part of an extended unit is Routed., the entire unit must collapse into the parent's hex and the entire stack is Routed (and retreated, 21.4). When Line Extensions rejoin their parent unit, the stack adopts the worst Morale State and fewest Movement Points remaining of the rejoining Line Extensions and parent unit. 13.3.2 When subtracting losses, apply any required reduction in strength level to the unit as a whole, and redistribute the strength levels evenly among the parent and its Line Extensions. If the unit no longer has enough strength to support its Line Extensions, eliminate one or more Line Extensions until the unit can support the remainder. 13.3.3 It is possible that a Line Extension could suffer an adverse combat result due to Opportunity Fire (17.4) or Reaction Charge (16.5) that would end its movement and potentially cause it to retreat. If the parent unit has not moved yet, it must end its movement adjacent to the Line Extension if possible. If the parent has already moved (or the parent unit failed to move adjacent to the Line Extension), the Line Extension is placed in a hex adjacent to the parent unit in its current Morale State at the end of the Movement Phase. If the Line Extension is Routed, it is treated as per 13.3.1.

13.3.4 Exotic situations

It is conceivable that Line Extensions can end up in illegal positions in ways not covered here. If so, place the illegal Line Extension adjacent to the parent unit and reduce its Morale State by one. If there is no parent unit on the map, declare one of the Line Extensions the new parent unit, then do the above.

Sidebar

Example

The 94 Ln-3-I is moving in line. To enter the elevated hex costs 2+1 = 3 Movement Points.

94 Ln-3-I places an extension on its right. This costs 1 MP to the parent unit (that now has spent 4) and 2+1 (line and slope) +1 (to be "born") = 4. The extension has thus spent 3+4 = 7 MP and may not move further. The parent unit may continue to move, but must stay adjacent to its extension.

The following turn, the parent unit moves one hex (cost 2) and so does the extension (2+1 (slope) =3 MP).

Removing the extension costs 1 MP to the parent unit and 1+2 =3 to the extension. So the parent unit has spent 3 MP and the extension 6. The parent unit is now considered to have spent 6 MP.

14.0 General Combat Rules

Each unit type has its own type of combat associated with it. Infantry units attack by entering hexes with enemy units, initiating Close Combat. Cavalry attacks by executing Cavalry Charges. Artillery and Skirmishers can fire in Fire Phases. Skirmishers can also attack in Close Combat under certain circumstances. Each type of combat is treated separately below, but some rules apply to more than one type of combat.

14.1 Line of Sight (LOS)

Line of Sight (LOS) determines whether two units can see one another. A LOS is important mainly for Artillery Fire Combat and Cavalry Charges, which can not take place without an LOS.

14.1.1 General Rules

Units have a LOS to each other (LOS is unblocked) unless terrain or units in an intervening hex block it. A LOS is blocked by hexes containing terrain such as Woods and Towns/ Villages (listed as Blocking terrain on the Movement Table), certain types of combat units, and hexes with elevation levels too high to see across. 14.1.1.1 Units always have an unblocked LOS into adjacent hexes. Features in the sighting or target hexes never affect LOS.

14.1.2 Determining LOS

Determine LOS by drawing a straight line from the center of the sighting unit's hex to the center of the target hex. Features in hexes passed through by the straight line could block LOS. If the line passes exactly along a hex side, features in either hex may block LOS. 14.1.2.1 The map uses contour lines which follow the actual terrain rather than the hex grid. For LOS purposes, units and terrain are always considered to occupy the highest elevation level in the hex. 14.1.2.2 Blocking terrain (as listed on the Movement Table) adds one elevation level to a hex's height. If the LOS passes through any part of the hex, not just the symbol, these features may block the LOS. Individual buildings and other minor features not classified as Blocking terrain never affect LOS. 14.1.2.3 Units between the firing and target units (except Skirmishers, which do not block LOS) add one elevation level to the hex's height. Skirmishers never block LOS, but they can prevent Artillery Fire Combat, see 24.2.4. 14.1.2.4 When in doubt, LOS is blocked.

14.1.3 Detailed LOS Procedure

14.1.3.1 Sighting and target units on same elevation level: If all elevation levels or terrain features between the sighting and target hexes are at the same or lower elevations, then the LOS is unblocked. If any elevation level or terrain feature between the sighting and target hexes is at a higher elevation, then the LOS is blocked. 14.1.3.2 Sighting and target units on different elevation levels: If any elevation level or terrain feature between the firing and target hexes is at a higher elevation than both the firing and target hexes, then the LOS is blocked. 14.1.3.3 Sighting and target units on different elevation levels - smooth slopes: If the sighting and target units are on different elevations, but the elevation lines between them are one or more hexes apart and evenly spaced (bring out a ruler if you can not agree), the slope itself will not block LOS. Any of the blocking terrain listed in the Movement Table will still block LOS. 14.1.3.4 Sighting and target unit on different elevation levels - curved slopes: For any other situation where the sighting and target units are on different elevations and one player believes that LOS is blocked, go through the following procedure (once you have done this a couple of times, you will get a feel for when an LOS is definitely clear or blocked, and will only have to use this procedure for trickier cases):

1) Find the elevation level of the sighting and target hex, as well as the distance between them in hexes. Always use the highest elevation level present in the hexes, regardless where it is in the hex. Plot the sighting and target hex at the correct elevation levels and distance on the graph provided with the rules or just use regular graph paper. 2) The owner of the target unit gets to choose one hex along the LOS which he thinks might block the LOS. This hex is called the hex of contention. 3) Find the elevation level of the hex of contention as well as the distance between the higher hex and the hex of contention. Plot the hex of contention at the right distance and elevation level in the graph. 4) Draw a straight line between the sighting and target hexes on the graph. If the hex of contention is on or above the line, the LOS is blocked. If the hex of contention is below the line, the LOS is unblocked. In case of doubt, the LOS is blocked.

Sidebar

It might be worth remembering, that all line of sight issues in this game should be viewed with two things in mind. First, Napoleonic battlefields were covered in smoke - a lot of it. Countless officers got themselves killed trying to figure out what was behind this or that smoke screen. Second, we are not trying to pick out a line of fire for a high-velocity anti-tank weapon here. We are trying to find an avenue for eight smooth-bore guns to bombard a 100-meter wide wall of soldiers dressed in white and wearing plumes on their heads; or we are trying to make sure that the route of our cavalry charge is ravine-free. It is quite a different matter.

OLDER GAMES Austerlitz uses a different model for terrain, with only one level per hex. Still, these LOS rules will work fine in that game too.

14.1.4 LOS Formula (optional)

For those who prefer to use a mathematical formula to calculate LOS, rather than drawing a graph, here's the formula:

d(H-L)/D + L

where... d = The distance from the hex of contention to the lower hex. H = The elevation of the higher hex. L = The elevation of the lower hex. D = The distance from the higher hex to the lower hex. If the elevation of the selected hex of contention is greater than or equal to the result, the LOS is blocked. Otherwise, the LOS is not blocked.

14.1.5 Visibility

Visibility is given on the Turn Record Track. It is in effect for that turn only and is the maximum range in hexes any LOS can extend. If no number is given, visibility is unlimited. Visibility numbers are inclusive: a five hex visibility allows ranges up to and including five hexes.

14.2 Lead Units

If a stack of more than one unit is engaged in combat, one unit of the stack must be the Lead Unit. The Lead Unit is used to determine combat and morale modifiers, and is the unit that will incur losses. In Artillery and Skirmisher Fire Combat, only the defending stack needs a Lead Unit. In Close Combat and Cavalry Charges, both sides need Lead Units. 14.2.1 Normally, the stack's top non-Skirmisher unit is the Lead Unit. A Skirmisher can only be a Lead Unit if alone in a hex. 14.2.2 When artillery performs Opportunity Fire (17.4), the unit that actually triggers the fire is the Lead Unit. If a stack triggered Opportunity Fire, use 14.2.1 to determine which unit in that stack is the Lead Unit. 14.2.3 If the Lead Unit is eliminated during combat resolution, immediately determine a new Lead Unit using the priorities above. The new Lead Unit is used for the rest of the combat resolution. 14.2.4 Artillery and Skirmisher units can engage enemy artillery selectively regardless of the target's position in a stack. In that case, that artillery unit is the Lead Unit (but see 17.1.7 for artillery stacked with high-morale units).

14.3 Reading the Combat Tables

Combat can result in Permanent Casualties, Stragglers and Morale Change. These are explained in 20.0. In the combat tables, the results are expressed as a number, a number in parenthesis and an M followed by a positive or negative number. The first is the number of Permanent Casualties, the second the number of Stragglers and the third the Morale Change. If a combat table modifier refers to the condition of a unit or stack, it is the status of the checking player's units that matter, unless the modifier specifically mentions the other player's units.

Sidebar

Example

An artilley unit in hex A wants to fire at hex C. Hexes A and C are at level 4. The hexes in the LOS (41.26) are also at level 4, so according to 14.1.3.1 LOS is not blocked between A and C.

To illustrate 14.1.3.4, A wants to fire at B. B is at level 1, with a distance of 5 hexes between them. Hexes 37.27 and 38.26 are possibly hexes of contention. They are drawn both at level 3, at the correct distances from A and B. The graph shows that hex 38.26 doesn't block LOS, while hex 37.27 does.

Between D and E the elevations are evenly spaced (1 level per hex). The graph (in gray) illustrates rule 14.1.3.3

distance

level

Example: Two weak infantry units and a reduced skirmisher suffer a staggering 3 (8) result after losing a close combat. The lead infantry unit can only take five casualties so 3 Permanent Casualties plus 2 Stragglers eliminates it. The second infantry unit now E becomes the lead unit and as it can take seven casualties it with minimal margin survives suffering 6 stragglers. The skirmisher could D have been selected for absorbing the 2nd Permanent Casualty, but in this case the player decided to keep his light bobs alive.

15.0 Close Combat

Close Combat is the mode of attack for infantry. Musket firing, rushing the enemy and the very rare bayonet fight are all covered by this process. It is initiated in the Movement Phase by entering an enemy-occupied hex. In the Close Combat Phase, the initiated Close Combats are resolved one at a time in any order the attacker chooses.

Basic Procedure: During the Movement Phase, infantry units and Skirmishers initiate Close Combat by entering an enemy-occupied hex, paying the MP cost of the hex +2 MP and ending their move. Artillery in the defending hex can Opportunity Fire if it has not already done so against the moving stack. Both players check to see if their troops stand. The result will either be an Attacker Win, a Defender Win, or if both sides stand, a Firefight. Each result has its appropriate loss tables for the attacker and defender. Losses are expressed as Permanent Casualties, Stragglers and Morale Change. The loser (or the attacker, in case of a Firefight) then retreats out of the hex and the Close Combat ends.

15.1 Initiating Close Combat

Only infantry (and Skirmishers under certain conditions, see 15.4.4) can initiate Close Combat. All units in the defending stack participate in the defense and suffer the results of combat. 15.1.1 All units wishing to conduct a Close Combat together must start the Movement Phase stacked together. Commanders can join a Close Combat without having started stacked. 15.1.2 Only one Close Combat may be initiated against a given hex each player turn. 15.1.3 Attacking units can be Wrecked and/or in any Morale State except Routed when initiating Close Combat. 15.1.4 The movement cost to initiate Close Combat is the cost of movement into the hex plus an additional 2 MP. The Road rate can not be used to enter Close Combat. A unit that has insufficient MPs to Close Combat a hex it starts adjacent to can still do so per 12.1.5, as long as it is not entering and/or crossing a Prohibited terrain feature. 15.1.5 Initiating Close Combat ends a stack's movement (exceptions listed in 15.1.7 and 15.1.8 below). The attacker must ensure that the attacking stack will be In Command (6.11), at the beginning of the Close Combat Phase. If this can not be assured, Close Combat is not allowed. 15.1.6 Units that have initiated Close Combat may not be the targets of Fire Combat in the following Non-phasing Fire Phase. 15.1.7 Skirmishers alone in a hex (and not attacked by Skirmishers only) may retreat before Close Combat. This is done in the Movement Phase. If in Hindering terrain, the Skirmisher has the choice of retreating or not, otherwise it must retreat. The retreat may not be to or adjacent to the hex the attacker came from. If the Skirmisher retreats, the attacking unit MAY continue to move (and may initiate another Close Combat, if it has sufficient MPs to do so), but the +2 MP cost to initiate Close Combat is still spent. A Skirmisher can not retreat into a hex containing an enemy stack. 15.1.8 Cavalry must withdraw 6-12 hexes if Close Combat is initiated against it (see 22.1). The attacking stack may continue to move, but still spends the +2 MP cost to initiate Close Combat.

15.2 Check to Stand

To determine the outcome of the Close Combat, each side determines if it stands, one player before the other. Compare the Lead Unit's Morale Rating with the Check to Stand table. Roll a die. If the result is equal to or greater than the number given in the table, the unit stands, otherwise it fails to stand. If the first checking player fails his check, the other player automatically passes his check, no roll is required.

15.2.1 Checking Order

The Check to Stand order is determined by the list to the right. Lower numbered cases take priority over higher numbered cases.

Sidebar

The lack of rules for infantry fire might surprise some people. We took it away as the old rules led to three-hour firefights and carefree advances to musketry range with no higher purpose than "let's see what happens".

The model was wrong on two levels, both scale and doctrine-wise. As for scale, even the longest musketry duels were over in less than one NBS-turn and took place at less than 75 meters. Formed infantry did not advance into musketry range unless they had the intent of closing with the enemy. Though, infantry melees using cold steel did not take place often in the Napoleonic era. At least not as long the side that folded first had a chance to get away, something that was hard only inside forts and villages. In most cases either the attacker stopped at long musketry range and could not get going again or the defender broke when it became clear that the attacker would not stop. When neither side felt like giving up the attacker would halt at point blank range and start firing. The sheer brutality of these fire-fights in our rules may surprise some people. But these shoot-outs (often at absurdly short ranges) were very destructive and the better the units involved in an exchange, the more appalling the carnage would be as neither side would have the sense to flinch before running out of ammo.

Based on these things the decision that all serious fighting should be treated as close combats (and all pot-shots ignored) came quite naturally. Players will probably also be delighted to find that this speeds up play considerably.

Checking Order 1) If the Close Combat takes place in or across Fortified Terrain, the attacker checks first. 2) If the attacker entered from a hex that had a higher elevation (See 14.1.2.1) than the combat hex, the defender checks first. If the attacker entered from a hex with a lower top elevation than the combat hex, the attacker checks first. The side which has the smallest stack (7.4) checks first. The attacker checks first.

15.2.2 Die Roll modifiers

The checking unit rolls against its Check to Stand number. The die-roll is modified by the die-roll modifiers from the Close Combat and All Cases portions of the Check to Stand Table. The die roll can be modified a maximum of +/- 4. Most of the modifiers are self-explanatory. Those which require further explanation are listed in the box to the right.

15.2.3 Check To Stand Outcome

If the checking unit rolls equal to or higher than the given value, it stands. If it rolls lower, it fails, and the other side has won the combat. 15.2.3.1 A Check to Stand roll of 6 is always a successful stand, regardless of die- roll modifiers. There is no automatic failure result, which means in some cases the stand is automatically successful. 15.2.3.2 If the first side to check fails its roll, the other side automatically stands, no die-roll is required. This means it is impossible for both sides to fail. 15.2.3.3 If the defender failed its Check to Stand, the result is Attacker Won. If the attacker failed it is a Defender Won result. If both sides pass their Check to Stand, the result is a Firefight.

15.3 Close Combat Results

After determining who won the combat, check the tables to determine the casualties. There are separate tables for attacker and defender if one side won. Each player rolls one die, modifies the result and compares it to the Morale Rating of the Lead Unit. If the result was a Firefight, see 15.3.3. 15.3.1 The winner in a Close Combat never loses more Permanent Casualties than the loser. Excess losses are ignored (they do not convert to Stragglers). Exception: winners in March Column always take their full losses. This rule does not apply to Firefights. 15.3.2 Defenders that lose Close Combat are automatically Routed, as listed on the Attacker Won table. 15.3.3 Firefight. In a Firefight, both players check their losses on the Firefight Table. Use the Column corresponding to the opponent's size and formation. 15.3.3.1 The "opponents at different levels" modifier is used for both sides in a Firefight, if the hex the attacker came from has a different top elevation than the Close Combat hex. 15.3.4 Large stacks (AA+) treat negative Morale Change results as one level less than that stated. M-2 becomes M-1, M-1 is negated, etc. Losing defenders are still Routed. This rule does not apply to Firefights. 15.3.5 On tables marked with a bullet, an unmodified 1 causes an M+2 instead of the printed morale result to A, B and some C-morale units. See Blood Lust results, 21.3.3. Any listed Permanent Casualties or Stragglers still apply. 15.3.6 If the stack taking losses has a total size of B or C both the Permanent Casualties and Straggler results are halved, rounding down, but never below 1. In a Firefight, only C-sized stacks halve their losses this way. 15.3.7 At night, 1 is added to the Straggler result. If the Straggler result was 0, it is still treated as 1 Straggler. All positive Morale Change results are ignored at night.

15.3.8 Retreat

After determining the result, the losing stack retreats one hex (unless it was Routed, in which case it retreats 6 hexes away from the enemy, see 21.4). In the case of a Firefight, the attacker retreats. If the attacking stack has to retreat, it retreats to the hex it entered from. A defender's retreat may not be to, or adjacent to, the hex the attacker came from. This retreat must be carried out even if the opponent was completely eliminated in the Close Combat. 15.3.9 Both the attacker and defender can freely adjust facing of units involved in Close Combat after the completion of the Close Combat. In addition, attacking French Combat Columns may change formation to Line if they win the combat (26.5).

Sidebar

Commander Advantage: If there is a Commander Advantage: If at least one of the sides has a Commander in the Close Combat, the side with the highest rated Commander has Commander Advantage. Exception: If one side has a 0 rated Commander, and the other side has no Commander, the side without a Commander has Commander Advantage. Skirmisher Disadvantage: If at least one side has Skirmishers in the combat, compare the Skirmisher Fire Point Values on the counters. The side with the lower Skirmisher Fire Point Value has Skirmisher Disadvantage. If the Skirmisher Fire Point Values are equal, neither side has Skirmisher Disadvantage. Disorganized Skirmishers are considered to have a Fire Point Value of 0. Opponent x2 or More Size: Use the size of the entire stack (7.4), not just the Lead Unit.

Example: A B-sized unit suffers a 1(3) result. The 3 Stragglers become 1.5, rounded down to 1. The 1 Permanent Casualty becomes 0.5, rounded to 1.

Example: Bailen is under attack. The Valencia Lt-3 attacks and routs the 3 Lgn Res-1. First, the extension collapses on the parent unit (13.3.1) and then, the whole unit retreats 6 hexes. The first hex of retreat can not be an hex adjacent to the hex the attacker came from (21.4.1), nor can the routed unit get closer to the enemy (unless at more than 6 hexes 21.4.1). These forbidden hexes are marked by crosses. In hex 1, the routed unit can't be fired at by the artillery because it is a required retreat (17.4.5) but it can be reaction charged by the Santiago cavalry unit (16.5.3). In hex 3, the router causes the skirmishers to be Shaken (morale down one). The rout then continues down Bailen Main Street.

Bailén

15.4 Close Combat Special Cases

15.4.1 Routed Units

If the defender starts the Close Combat in a Routed status, it automatically fails its Check to Stand, and the attacker automatically passes the check. Check losses normally. If the attacker is Routed before checking to stand (due to artillery Opportunity Fire), the attacker immediately retreats out of the hex and the Close Combat ends. Units Routed when applying Close Combat results are treated normally, and it is entirely possible that both the attacker and the defender will be Routed as a result of Close Combat. Routed units retreat 6 hexes away from the nearest enemy, per 21.4.

15.4.2 Line Extensions

An attacking or defending unit with Line Extensions might be involved in more than one Close Combat. If this happens, resolve all Close Combats with that unit before applying any results. This means that a reduction in size or a Rout result on one part of the extended unit will not affect the other Close Combats. After all Close Combats involving the extended unit are resolved, the losses are added together, and the size and number of Line Extensions adjusted accordingly. If any part of the unit was Routed it collapses into its parent hex (see 13.3.1); otherwise apply Morale Change results to each part of the unit separately. If the unit was Wrecked (21.6) in the combat, all parts of the unit suffer the additional Morale Change penalty.

15.4.3 Artillery in Close Combat

When the attacker initiates Close Combat against a hex containing artillery, the artillery gets to Opportunity Fire (if it hasn't done so already) using Cannister (17.4.9). After that, the artillery unit has no effect on the Close Combat resolution, except for possibly adding its size to the defending total. 15.4.3.1 If an artillery unit is defending alone in a hex, it is treated as a size C unit and checks to stand normally. The attacker does not roll for losses in the Close Combat, regardless of the result. The artillery unit, if forced to retreat, rolls on the Gun Loss Table instead of the Combat Losses Tables. Limbered artillery alone in a hex automatically fails its Check to Stand.

15.4.4 Skirmishers in Close Combat

Skirmishers stacked with other units may participate in Close Combat both as attackers and defenders. Skirmishers alone may only initiate Close Combat against other Skirmishers. Skirmishers may sometimes retreat before Close Combat, see 15.1.7. If a Skirmisher can and chooses to stay and fight, treat it as a C-size Line.

15.4.4.1 Skirmisher vs Skirmisher fights

In a Skirmisher vs Skirmisher fight, Check to Stand normally. A full Skirmisher is twice the size of a reduced Skirmisher, for size comparison. Skirmisher vs Skirmisher fights do not use the Combat Losses Tables. Instead, the loser suffers an M-2 Morale Change and rolls a die. If the roll is a 1, it is reduced (already reduced Skirmishers are eliminated). The winner, or both sides in a Firefight, suffers no ill effect. Retreats are handled normally (15.3.8) unless the result was a Firefight. In this case, the side that had the lowest modified Check to Stand roll retreats (attacker retreats if the modified Check to Stand rolls were equal).

15.4.4.2 Skirmisher/Artillery Combo

Skirmishers and artillery stacked together without infantry execute Close Combat as usual. They are considered to have a combined size of C, the artillery is the Lead Unit, and the Skirmisher can absorb every other loss as usual. In the case of a Firefight, the Skirmisher fires as a C-size Line unit (whether full or reduced size).

15.4.5 Square

Defending units in Square automatically change formation to Column and have their Morale State reduced by 1 when Close Combat is initiated. This does NOT trigger Opportunity Fire. Exception: If the unit in Square has or is a Line Extension, it changes formation to Line instead, since a unit with Line Extensions can never be in Column formation. This Morale Change can never cause the unit to become worse than DG.

15.4.6 March Column

If a unit is in March Column in a Close Combat, the opponent ignores any Permanent Casualties or Stragglers resulting from the combat, only the morale result is implemented.

15.4.7 Village Fighting

See 19.0.

Sidebar

In real life skirmishers did rush artillery from time to time. But most of the time they preferrd to stay at a distance and shoot the gunners instead.

16.0 Cavalry Charges

Cavalry Charges are the cavalry equivalent of Close Combat. It is more reliant on shock and less on fire than infantry Close Combat, and the results tend to be more spectacular; either brilliant successes or total disasters. Cavalry Charges are resolved in the Movement Phase. Cavalry Charges against infantry/artillery and against cavalry use different procedures. The Lead Unit in the defending stack determines which procedure to use.

16.1 Initiating Cavalry Charges

To initiate a charge, a cavalry stack announces a target stack that is both within 1-3 hexes and within its frontal arc. The charge's route and target hex must be free of Hindering terrain (but it may start from Hindering terrain, see the Movement Table). The path of a charge must be in as straight a line as the hex grain allows. Charging cavalry cannot use Roads or Bridges. Hexes entered during a cavalry charge do not consume a unit's MA--a cavalry unit can move its full MA and then announce a charge. 16.1.1 Blown, Wrecked, or cavalry in a Morale State other than BL or Normal may not initiate Cavalry Charges. 16.1.2 An unblocked LOS must exist between the charging stack and the target hex when the charge is announced. 16.1.3 The hexes between the charging stack and the target hex must be empty of all units—friendly and enemy. Exception: You ARE allowed to charge through Skirmishers, even friendly Skirmishers (see 16.3.3.2). The target hex may not contain an initiated Close Combat. 16.1.4 To charge as a stack, cavalry units must begin the Movement Phase stacked together. Commanders can join a charge without having started stacked. 16.1.5 Charging cavalry units must be In Command when the charge is announced. They are allowed to END the Movement Phase outside Command Range. A Divisional Commander accompanying a Cavalry Charge may end up far away from the rest of his division. In this case, the Commander is obliged to get back to a position in line with his orders as soon as possible. 16.1.6 A hex or stack can be charged any number of times in a phase. 16.1.7 Artillery in the defending hex can Opportunity Fire, if it has not already done so, against charging cavalry that enters the hex. For cavalry charges against infantry, this same hex opportunity fire is not resolved until after the result of the charge is known; in the case of the cavalry breaking off, the ability to OF is determined by a die roll on the Breakoff table.

16.2 Cavalry Charges Against Infantry/Artillery

The attacker announces the target stack. The target stack may form Square. The attacking cavalry then moves into the hex of the target stack, possibly triggering Reaction Charges and/or Opportunity Fire along the way. The defender checks to stand. If the defender fails, the charge is successful, and Follow-on Charges are possible. If the defender stands, the attacker must attempt Breakoff. If successful, there is no charge. If the attacker fails, the cavalry is Repulsed, and the charge ends.

16.2.1 Forming Square

The defender has the choice of forming Square to meet the Cavalry Charge. Square forming is automatic (see 8.3), but may trigger Opportunity Fire from artillery.

16.2.2 Check to Stand

Only the defender checks to stand in a Cavalry Charge against an infantry/artillery stack. To Check to Stand the defender rolls a die and applies the appropriate modifiers from the Cavalry Charge portion of the Check to Stand Table. The Check to Stand roll can be modified by a maximum of +/- 4. Most of the modifiers are self-explanatory. Those which require further explanation are listed to the right. Check to Stand outcome If the defending unit rolls equal to or higher than the given value, the defender stands, and the cavalry must make a Breakoff Attempt (16.2.4). The result of the Breakoff Attempt will be either a Breakoff (16.2.5) or a Repulse(16.2.6). If the defender rolls lower, he fails, and the result is a Successful Charge. A Check to Stand roll of 6 is always a successful stand, regardless of die-roll modifiers.

Sidebar

Forming square is now automatic as it occurred historically. The cavalry versus infantry "chicken race" so popular in wargames is a misconception turned real life event. Forming square or bunching up in one the many kinds of closed columns available was not something that infantry did as an improvized last minute stunt, nor did cavalry attack infantry in the hope that the stunt would fail. Most of the time the infantry saw the cavalry approaching (at a walk) a couple hundred meters out and formed square in an orderly manner. The cavalry then slowed down and halted outside of musket range. This forced the infantry to halt and cease doing whatever they were bent on doing, which was the best result the cavalry could hope for under most circumstances. Solitary squares could sometimes be worn down by persistent cavalry charging in waves, but the best way to break a square was to just use the cavalry to keep it in place while you shot it to shreds with artillery.

Note: 17.4.2 still applies, so the artillery unit cannot fire Opportunity Fire both when the charging cavalry is doing its charge movement and during charge resolution. To do the latter, it must hold its fire.

Commander Advantage: If there is a Commander in the defending stack, and it is higher rated than any Commander in the attacking stack, the defender has Commander Advantage. Exception: If the defender has a 0 rated Commander, and the attacker has no Commander, the defender does not get the Commander Advantage. Lines: If the Lead Unit is in Line formation it receives a negative modifier unless its flanks are secure. The flanks are considered secure if both flank hexes of the stack contain either Hindering terrain or other friendly infantry units in Line. Opponent stack twice the size: Use the size of the entire stack (see 7.0), not just the Lead Unit when determining this.

16.2.3 Succesful Charge

If the charge was successful, the defender is Routed (but does not execute its Rout Retreat until Follow-on Charges are resolved) and checks losses on the Defender's Losses portion of the Charge Successful Table. Roll one die, adjust the result by any of the applicable modifiers and cross reference the result with the size of the defending stack. The attacking cavalry checks losses on the Attacker's Losses column on the Charge Successful Table in a similar fashion. The attacking cavalry can get a Blood Lust result, see 21.3.3. Follow-on Charges may now be possible, see 16.2.7. If no Follow-on Charges are attempted the charge ends, see 16.2.8. 16.2.3.1 If there is defending artillery in the stack, roll for Opportunity Fire before rolling for the losses for either side.

16.2.4 Breakoff Attempt

If the defender made a successful stand, the attacking cavalry must make a Morale Check (21.2). If the unit passes the check, Breakoff occurs. If the check fails, the cavalry fails to Breakoff and the result is a Repulse, 16.2.6.

16.2.5 Breakoff

If there is a successful Breakoff, the attacker rolls a die and consults the Breakoff column of the Breakoff & Repulse Table. Modify the die by the Lead Unit's morale modifier as indicated on the table. The result will either be a Morale Change or an OF. An OF result means the attacker got so close that artillery in the defending hex got to Opportunity Fire (17.4). Resolve the Opportunity Fire as Cannister fire, (17.4.8.) The defender also rolls a die. If the result is odd, the defender suffers an M-1 Morale Change. The defender suffers no other effects. The charge now ends, see 16.2.8.

16.2.6 Repulse

If the attacker is Repulsed, roll for Opportunity Fire from any artillery in the defending hex. The attacker then checks his losses from the Repulse by making a die roll on the Breakoff & Repulse Table, using the Repulse column. Modify the die-roll as indicated. The defender also rolls a die. If the result is odd, the defender suffers an M-1 Morale Change. The defender suffers no other effects. The charge now ends, see 16.2.8.

16.2.7 Follow-on Charges

If the result was a Successful Charge, the attacking cavalry may make Follow-on Charges if desired. The target of a Follow-on Charge may either be the original target stack, or another hex within 2 hexes (subject to all the provisions and restrictions of initiating a charge), attacking player's choice. The attacking cavalry may target a different stack for each Follow-on Charge. Up to 3 Follow-on Charges are allowed. Cavalry stacks may not be the target of Follow-on Charges. 16.2.7.1 Follow-on Charges are allowed even if the attacking cavalry has become Shaken or Wrecked during the charge. DG or Routed stacks may not Follow-on Charge. Follow-on Charges are always voluntary. 16.2.7.2 If the charging cavalry decides to direct the Follow-on Charge against the current target stack, do not initiate a new Charge, just roll again on the Defender Losses portion of the Charge Successful Table. The charging cavalry takes no additional losses. Use the original size of the defending stack to determine the appropriate column of the table to use. The defending stack does not execute its Rout Retreat until all Follow-on Charges are resolved. No Reaction Charges are allowed in reaction to Follow-on Charges against the same target. 16.2.7.3 If the target is a different stack, the Routed defenders of the previous charge are retreated and the attacking stack is refaced so that the target hex is in the frontal arc of the charging stack. Resolve Follow-on Charges as regular charges. 16.2.7.4 If the target of the Follow-on Charge was adjacent to the original target, and the original target was able to form Square but choose not to, the follow-on target may not form Square either. Targets within one hex of the last target in subsequent Follow-on Charges may not form Square either. Targets 2 hexes away from an original or Follow-on target can form Square normally. If the original target did form Square, any follow on targets capable of forming Square may do so. 16.2.7.5 The whole attacking stack must Follow-on Charge together without splitting up. It may alter its stacking order before making the Follow-on Charge. 16.2.7.6 After resolving all Follow-on Charges, the Cavalry Charge ends.

Sidebar

The Big Charge Example

The French 1-HC cavalry is charging some British infantry and artillery. The charge runs straight through the Skirmishers.

Sk retreat

The Skirmishers retreat out of the way without penalty. The targeted infantry forms Square (thus protecting the artillery). The French artillery Opportunity Fire against the formation change, shaking the Square.

The charging cavalry is placed in the target hex. (Note that in the case of cavalry the British artillery's Opportunity Fire is not resolved yet. The result of the charge will allow it to fire or not.) The target has to Check to Stand now: being a B morale it needs a 2. The following modifiers apply "SH -1" and "In Square +1". The British stand by rolling a 3.

The French cavalry now needs to pass a Morale Check to avoid a repulse. A 4 is needed and no modifiers apply. A 4 is rolled so Breakoff occurs. The French then roll 2 on the Breakoff result table, which became a 1 because of their B morale. This means that Opportunity Fire can now be resolved (the cavalry stopped so close to the enemy that it suffered some cannister fire). Surviving that the cavalry is Blown and retreats 6 hexes. Following this Breakoff, the defenders roll one die. A 3 (odd!) is rolled , which means a m-1: DG!

Continued on next page.

16.2.8 Charge End

After the charge and any Follow-on Charges are resolved, the charge ends. The attacking cavalry retreats 6-12 hexes (owners choice of distance, unless the stack is Routed, in which case it must be 6 hexes) and then becomes Blown. The cavalry stack cannot move any further in this Movement Phase. Defending stacks that were Routed due to Successful Charge results immediately retreat 6 hexes, if they have not done so already.

16.3 Cavalry Charge Special Cases

16.3.1 Routed Defenders

If the defender is in a Routed state at the start of a Cavalry Charge, it automatically fails its Check to Stand, and the charge is successful. The defender checks losses normally, the attacker takes no losses. If the defender manages to get himself Routed after the charge is announced, but before checking to stand (due to Opportunity Fire, for example), resolve as per this rule. (No, the defender doesn't get to retreat to safety before the charge hits).

16.3.2 Artillery

If an artillery unit or stack is defending alone in a hex, it is treated like a size C unit and checks to stand normally. The attacker does not roll for losses in combat, regardless of the result. The artillery unit, if forced to retreat, rolls on the Gun Loss Table instead of the Charge Successful Table. Limbered artillery alone in the hex automatically fails its Check to Stand.

16.3.3 Skirmishers

A Skirmisher alone in a hex and the target of a Cavalry Charge (regular or Reaction) must retreat one hex to escape, either into a hex the cavalry can not enter or to a hex with a friendly non-Skirmisher unit. If the Skirmisher retreats into a hex that cavalry can not charge into, or into a friendly occupied hex, then the cavalry is placed back into the hex from where it started the Cavalry Charge. It is not Blown, and it may initiate a new charge if it wishes. If the Skirmisher can not reach friends or cover, it is automatically eliminated and the Cavalry Charge ends the usual way, with the cavalry stack retreating and becoming Blown. It may not follow up. If the Skirmisher retreated due to a Reaction Charge, its movement is ended for that phase. 16.3.3.1 The Skirmisher can't retreat into a hex where Close Combat has been initiated. 16.3.3.2 Cavalry can choose to charge through a hex containing just Skirmishers (even friendly Skirmishers!). In this case the Skirmishers must move one hex "out of the way". If the Skirmishers can not move into a hex that isn't in the path of the charge, they are eliminated. Enemy Skirmishers (only) will also lose one step if the hex they moved into doesn't contain enemy non-Skirmishers or Hindering terrain. 16.3.3.3 Skirmisher/artillery Combo. Skirmishers and artillery stacked together without infantry Check to Stand as usual (16.4.1). Their total size is C, the artillery is the Lead Unit, and if they fail to stand, they check losses on the Cavalry Charge Successful Table as usual. The Skirmisher can absorb every other loss. The attacker does not roll for losses in combat, regardless of the result (although any losses and/or Morale Change results suffered due to Opportunity Fire still apply).

16.3.4 March Column

If a defending Lead Unit is in March Column the charging cavalry ignores any Permanent Casualties resulting from the combat, only the morale result is implemented on the attacker.

FLOWCHART: Charging cavalry against infantry/artillery 1) Attacker announces charging stack and target hex. 2) Units in the target hex can choose to form Square. This can trigger Opportunity Fire and Morale Degradation if in a ZoI. 3) The attacker moves into the target hex. This can trigger Opportunity Fire from artillery units or Reaction Charges along the way. 4) The defender checks to stand. If successful, go to 6, otherwise, continue. 5) The charge is successful. Roll for Opportunity Fire from defending artillery in the target hex. The defender is Routed and checks losses on the Charge Succesful Table. The attacking cavalry checks for losses on the Charge Successful Table. The defender is Routed. Follow- on Charges are possible. Otherwise, the charge ends. The defender is retreated 6 hexes. Go to 9. 6) The attacking cavalry attempts Breakoff by making a Morale Check. If it fails, go to 8, otherwise continue. 7) Breakoff successful. The attacker checks the Breakoff & Repulse Table for results. The defender rolls a die. Odd = M-1, otherwise no effect. The Charge ends. Go to 9. 8) The Cavalry Charge is repulsed. Roll for Opportunity Fire from defending artillery in the target hex. The attacker checks his losses on the Breakoff & Repulse Table, using the Repulse column. The defender rolls a die. Odd = M-1, otherwise no effect. The charge ends. Go to 9. 9) The attacker retreats 6-12 hexes and then becomes Blown.

Sidebar

From last page.

The second French Cavalry unit now charges the same target. Again, the British brigade has to check to stand. This time the modifiers are - 2 for DG and +1 for Square. A 2 is rolled for a net result of 1. As the British rout, the charge is successful. Opportunity Fire is resolved against the French. The attacker also rolls on the successful charge 'Attacker's losses' table (2 is rolled, no loss). The Britsh player rolls a 4 on the successful charge 'Defender's losses' table, which means 2 casualties for an A size unit. In addition, he rolls on the Gun Losses table because his artillery is routed (21.4.6). 6, with +2 because of an attack by cavalry, all guns are destroyed.

The British retreat is not conducted yet as the French cavalry can now continue to kill red- coats by making Follow-on Charges. Three Follow-on Charges are allowed. So Anson's brigade rolls again on the Defenders losses table, thrice..

16.4 Cavalry Charges Against Cavalry

If the Lead Unit in the target stack of a Cavalry Charge is a cavalry unit, the resolution procedure is, thankfully, simpler. The attacker announces the target hex, then moves into it, possibly triggering Reaction Charges and/or Opportunity Fire along the way. The target stack has the choice of reaction charging the attacking stack, turning the roles around. Both sides Check to Stand (usually the defender first) and the result will be a win for one side or a draw. Roll for the result on the appropriate column of the Cavalry vs. Cavalry Losses Table. The charge then ends.

16.4.1 Check to Stand

To determine the outcome of the Cavalry Charge, each side in turn makes a Check to Stand roll and applies the appropriate modifiers from the Cavalry Charge portion of the Check to Stand Table. (Those modifiers which require further explanation are listed to the right.) If the result is equal to or greater than the number given in the table, the unit stands, otherwise it fails to stand.

16.4.1.1 Checking order

The defender checks to stand first, followed by the attacker. Exception: If the defender is a charging cavalry stack being Reaction Charged (by a unit other than the original target), the defender can choose to check second, but automatically forfeits the original charge, retreats and is Blown after the charge resolution. 16.4.1.2 If the target unit chose to Reaction Charge the charging unit, the roles will be reversed, and the unit that started the fracas will be the defender. 16.4.1.3 If the first checking player fails the check, the other player automatically passes the check, no roll required. 16.4.1.4 The Check to Stand roll can be modified by a maximum of +/- 4. Most of the modifiers are self-explanatory. Those which require further explanation are listed to the right.

16.4.2 Cavalry Charge Results

The side that failed its Check to Stand loses the combat, the other side wins. If both sides stand the result is a draw. Both players roll on the Cavalry vs. Cavalry Losses Table, on the column corresponding to their result. There are no die-roll modifiers, but the losses may be adjusted up or down, depending on the size of the involved forces. 16.4.2.1 If the target hex contains other units than cavalry, these units become Routed and retreat 6 hexes (Unlimbered artillery rolls on the Gun Loss Table) if the defending cavalry lost, otherwise they are unaffected.

16.4.3 Charge End

After determining the result, the charge ends. No Follow-on Charges are allowed. Both sides now retreat 6-12 hexes (attacker first) and become Blown, with the exceptions below: 16.4.3.1 If the defender was a charging stack that did not forfeit its charge to Check to Stand second, and won the combat, the defender may continue the original charge. 16.4.3.2 If the defender was a stationary cavalry unit that did not choose to Reaction Charge and won the combat, the defender does not retreat or become Blown. 16.4.3.3 If a cavalry unit was Routed, it retreats 6 hexes, no choice of distance, and becomes Blown.

16.5 Reaction Charges

Reaction Charges can occur when units (including charging cavalry, retreating or withdrawing units, etc.) move in the "Reaction Zone" of enemy cavalry. Unless otherwise mentioned in these rules, a Reaction Charge is treated just like a regular charge. The triggers are listed to the right. 16.5.1 The Reaction Zone of a cavalry unit includes all hexes 1 to 3 hexes from the unit which are in any direction and in the LOS of the cavalry's hex. Hexes with terrain hindering Cavalry Charges and hexes outside of LOS are considered to be outside the zone. 16.5.2 Reaction Charges can occur in any phase, not just the Movement Phase. Routed units retreating in the various Combat or Rally Phases make excellent cavalry targets.

Sidebar

Most cavalry combats did not lead to actual fighting as lots of charges where unleashed just to keep other cavalry distracted. The moment you saw that your target had been lured away from doing what it had been ordered to do that was it. You slowed down, halted and exchanged a few unpleasentries before falling back to reform.

Commander Advantage: If at least one side has a Commander in the combat, the side with the highest rated Commander has Commander Advantage. Exception: If one side has a 0 rated Commander, and the other side has no Commander, the side without Commander has Commander Advantage. Heavy versus Light Cavalry: If one side has Heavy and the other Light cavalry as the Lead Units, the side with the Light cavalry gets a negative modifier. Stationary Cavalry: If the checking cavalry is stationary, that is, neither moving nor charging, it receives this modifier. Opponent x2 or More Size: Use the size of the entire stack (7.0), not just the Lead Unit when determining this.

Reaction Charge Triggers A Reaction Charge can occur (at the charging player's discretion) at the following triggers: a) When a unit enters a hex in the Reaction Zone. The charge takes place after the unit has entered the hex. b) When a unit changes formation in the Reaction Zone. The charge takes place after the Formation Change. c) When a unit attempts to move out of a Reaction Zone (including into Hindering terrain). The charge takes place before the unit leaves the triggering hex. d) After a unit has finished its move in the Reaction Zone.

All these hexes are the Reaction Charge zone (16.5.1). To react to a trigger occuring in the white hexes, a unit would need to pass a Morale Check (16.5.5).

16.5.3 A Cavalry Charge can only have one Reaction Charge made against it during its charge. You are allowed to initiate a Reaction Charge against another reaction charge, but ONLY if the initial Reaction Charge was triggered by a non-cavalry unit. These restrictions apply both to charge movement and the subsequent retreat of the charging unit. Reaction Charges are not allowed into the target hex of a charging cavalry. 16.5.4 No Follow-on Charges are allowed after Reaction Charges.

16.5.5 If the triggering unit started outside the frontal arc of the unit wanting to Reaction Charge, it must pass a Morale Check (21.2). If the reacting cavalry passes the check, reface the unit so that the target hex is in its frontal arc and execute the charge. If the unit fails the check, it keeps its original facing and cannot Reaction Charge the triggering unit. This still counts as a Reaction Charge for 16.5.3. 16.5.6 For non-cavalry units, after resolving a Reaction Charge, the originally moving unit can continue to move (if able to do so) with any remaining MPs it might have, unless it formed Square, in which case its movement ends. The resolution of the charge does not expend any of the moving unit's MA.

16.5.7 For cavalry charging other cavalry, the target cavalry unit does or does not become Blown and retreats as per 16.4.3. 16.5.8 A Square that attempts to move but fails its Morale Check (8.3.2) still counts as moving and can generate a Reaction Charge. 16.5.9 Facing changes, Routed units rallying, or Blown cavalry recovering never generate Reaction Charges. 16.5.10 Cavalry which conducts a Reaction Charge vs. a Skirmisher unit which retreats as per 16.3.3 is placed back into its original hex and is not Blown. A cavalry unit can execute any number of Reaction Charges of this sort in a single phase and never becomes Blown because of them.

17.0 Artillery Fire Combat

In the Fire Phases, Unlimbered artillery units can fire through their frontal hexes at one target within range and LOS. In addition friendly actions may trigger Opportunity Fire from enemy artillery in the Movement Phase. Basic Procedure: To fire, determine the Artillery Fire Value on the Artillery Fire Values Table by cross referencing the number of guns and the range. If the unmodified number is 0, no Fire Combat is allowed. Modify the Artillery Fire Value based on the list of modifiers in the Artillery Fire Table and roll a die.

If the result is higher than the modified Fire Value, no losses are taken by the target unit.
If the roll is equal to the modified Fire Value, one Permanent Casualty is taken.
If the result is less than the modified Fire Value, the difference is the total number of losses, with half being Stragglers and half being Permanent Casualties. Odd points are Permanent Casualties.
If the die roll was odd, the target unit suffers a Morale Change, M-2 if losses were taken, otherwise M-1 (exception: see 17.1.7).

17.1 General Rules

17.1.1 Only Unlimbered artillery may fire. Disorganized and Routed artillery may not fire.

17.1.2 Artillery can target other artillery units, even if they are not the top units of a stack (See 14.2 for stacking order rules.). This can lead to two Artillery Fire Combats against the same hex, in which case a Grand Battery (17.3) is required. 17.1.3 Artillery may never fire through or over friendly units, including Skirmishers, regardless of LOS considerations.

17.1.4 Artillery units cannot fire through adjacent enemy Skirmishers, despite the fact that they do not block LOS (they are harassing the gunners). The hexes containing the harrassing Skirmishers can be targeted by the artillery. Non-adjacent enemy Skirmishers do not block artillery fire.

Sidebar

FLOWCHART: Charging cavalry against cavalry 1) Attacker announces charging stack and target hex. 2) The attacker moves into the target hex. This can trigger Opportunity Fire or Reaction Charges (including from the target stack). 3) Check to Stand. The defender checks first. 4) The side that fails the Check to Stand loses, the other side wins. If both sides pass their checks, the result is a draw. Both players roll on the Cavalry vs. Cavalry Losses Table, on the column corresponding to their result. 5) The charge ends. Both sides retreat 6-12 hexes and then become Blown.

This is also expressed in the Artillery Fire Table, for those who find tables easier.

Example: An Austrian battery of 3 Light Gun Points is firing at a Shaken French B morale infantry unit in Column stacked with a Commander. The range is 2 hexes. 3 Light Gun Points at a range of 2 converts to 2 Fire Points. The French infantry is in Column, so there is a +1 modifier leading to the 3 FP column. The die roll is a 3, giving a result of 1M-2. B morale units get to reduce any morale result by 1, so the M-2 result becomes M-1, and the Shaken marker is flipped to Disorganised. 1 Permanent Casualty is marked off on the Loss Sheet. Finally, 2 dice are rolled for the Commander casualty, giving 9 (no effect).

17.1.5 Artillery units in a hex where Close Combat has been initiated can not fire in the Non-Phasing Fire Phase. 17.1.6 The Flanked Line modifier applies when the artillery fire enters the target hex from a hex in the flank of a target unit in Line formation.

17.1.7 Unwrecked A and B morale units as well as C morale units stacked with a Commander with a 1 or better Command Rating receive a morale bonus when fired at by artillery. Reduce any Morale Change result of Artillery Fire Combat against these units by 1, so that an M-2 becomes an M-1 and M-1 becomes no effect. This bonus also applies to artillery targeted separately, when stacked with these units. The morale bonus applies even if the unit was wrecked in the fire the morale result came from.

17.2 Artillery Fire Values

Cross reference the number and type of gun points firing with the distance to the target unit. if there is no value, the stack can not fire. Up to 5 points of artillery can fire out of a hex, any excess guns are ignored. Artillery units can use some of their gun points to fire against one target hex and then others to fire at another target hex, as long as no more than a total of 5 gun points fire out of any given hex. Exception: Only 1 gun point may fire out of a Town/Village hex.

17.3 Grand Batteries

Unless stated otherwise below, an artillery unit may not fire at the same target hex as another artillery unit, even if the artillery units are stacked together, except when all firing artillery units are adjacent to the target, or in Close Combat. National exceptions are specified below. 17.3.1 France : In scenarios prior to 1805, French artillery units stacked with or adjacent to each other may fire at the same target hex. From 1805 and on, French artillery may fire without any of the limits above. 17.3.2 Russia : In scenarios taking place in 1807 or later, Russian artillery units may fire at the same target hex provided that all firing units are either stacked with or adjacent to each other. 17.3.3 Prussia : In scenarios taking place in 1813 or later, Prussian artillery units may fire at the same target hex provided that all firing units are either stacked with or adjacent to each other. 17.3.4 Austria : In scenarios taking place in 1809 or later, Austrian artillery units may fire at the same target hex provided that all firing units are either stacked with or adjacent to each other, and they belong to the same division. Corps artillery counts as belonging to its own division. From 1813 on, the division restriction is dropped. 17.3.5 British and Spanish units may never use Grand Batteries. 17.3.6 When more than one artillery unit fires at a target, sort the firing units by gun size (Light vs Heavy) and add up the gun points in each category. Determine the Artillery Fire Values from the Artillery Fire Values Table by cross referencing the number of each size of gun points and the longest distance for each size. Make separate die rolls for Light and Heavy artillery. Add the losses together, but apply only the worst Morale Change result. If a size has more than 5 gun points firing, execute separate Fire Combats of 5 points, with any remainder as its own Fire Combat. Modify each fire value separately.

17.4 Opportunity Fire

Unlimbered artillery units have an Opportunity Fire Zone that consists of those hexes in the unit's fire arc and LOS which are at or within 3 hexes. Artillery units can fire at units moving within this zone. The triggers are listed to the right. 17.4.1 Each artillery unit (or stack of artillery units) can only fire at a given unit once each Movement Phase. Given this, an artillery unit can Opportunity Fire any number of times. A single unit may only be fired at by one unit (or stack, if the Grand Battery restrictions allow it) per trigger. 17.4.2 Resolve Opportunity Fire as regular Artillery Fire Combat when it happens. Movement or Formation Change activities of a unit and its Line Extensions generate Opportunity Fire separately.

17.4.3 Opportunity Fire has no effect on the artillery unit's ability to fire in a later Fire Phase.

Sidebar

The greatest Napoleonic development in artillery tactics was the evolution of centralized control. While a typical late 18th century army had its guns dispersed out among individual battalions and effectively out of any higher commander's reach, the French way to do things was to mass the artillery and make sure that their fire was directed by senior officers that were in on the plan. The era saw these techniques escalate from Marmont's battery of 10-off guns at Marengo to the 100+ gun batteries repeatedly amassed in 1813. The rules now try to reflect how the concept of centralized fire control spread during that time.

Example: Two 4 point light artillery units fire at a cavalry unit three hexes distant. The fire is resolved as one Artillery Fire Value 5 attack (2 on the Artillery Fire Value table, modified to 3 for cavalry) and one Artillery Fire Value 3 attack (1 modified to 2).

Opportunity Fire Triggers 1 ) When a unit enters a hex in the Opportunity Fire Zone. The fire takes place after the unit has entered the hex. 2 ) When a unit enters the hex the artillery unit is in from the front or flank. The fire takes place after the unit has entered the hex (in a Cavalry Charge, it is not resolved immediately, see 16.0). 3 ) When a unit changes formation in the Opportunity Fire Zone. The fire is considered to take place before the Formation Change, but the firer gets to choose which of the two formations the unit is considered in (usually choosing the one with the best fire modifiers). 4 ) When a unit attempts to move out of an Opportunity Fire Zone (including out of LOS). The fire takes place before the unit can leave the hex. 5 ) After a unit has finished its move in the Opportunity Fire Zone.

Note that the Zone includes the artillery unit's own hex.

17.4.5 Units executing required retreats never trigger Opportunity Fire. This includes Routed units moving their required 6 hexes away from enemy units, Skirmishers retreating before Close Combat or Cavalry Charges, and cavalry retreating after charges at the end of a Cavalry Charge. Voluntary withdrawals DO trigger Opportunity Fire.

17.4.6 Entering Square formation during a Cavalry Charge or Reaction Charge will generate Opportunity Fire. If this occurs, momentarily interrupt the charge sequence, execute the Opportunity Fire, then follow through with the charge's completion. A unit Disorganized by Opportunity Fire does not form Square. 17.4.7 A Square that attempts to move but fails its Morale Check still counts as moving and can trigger Opportunity Fire.

17.4.8 Facing changes, Routed units rallying and Blown cavalry recovering never generate Opportunity Fires. Commanders moving alone do not trigger Opportunity Fire.

17.4.9 Cannister

Artillery units that Opportunity Fire at units entering their hex (to initiate Close Combat or during Cavalry Charges) fire Cannister. Units using Cannister roll twice using their range 1 Fire Value. Unlike with Grand Batteries, you DO add the Morale Change results of the rolls together. A and B (and C plus a 1-rated Commander) morale units reduce any Morale Change result on both rolls. If two 1 step losses are suffered from Cannister, the even loss can be taken by a Skirmisher. 17.4.9.1 For Cannister, ignore the +1 modifier for targets in Column or size AA+, as well as any terrain modifiers. 17.4.9.2 Cannister CAN be used if the attacker entered the artillery's hex from a flank hex, though it does so with a -1 modifier. Artillery can never fire against attackers entering the artillery's hex from the rear.

18.0 Skirmisher Fire Combat

Each Skirmisher may fire at one target stack per Fire Phase. Skirmishers can fire separately or together, but any one hex can only be the target of one Skirmisher Fire Combat per Fire Phase. To fire with Skirmishers, add the Fire Values of all the Skirmishers firing against a single target and subtract the Fire Value of any Skirmishers in the target hex. Modify the Fire Value by the modifiers listed for Skirmisher Fire in the tables and roll a die. If the result is equal to or lower than the modified Fire Value, the target hex takes a Hit, the result depending on the Lead Unit. 18.1 Skirmishers can fire at adjacent hexes only. Due to their all-around frontal facing, they can fire in any direction.

18.2 Calculate the Skirmisher Fire Value by adding together their printed Fire Values and round all fractions down, then add modifiers. If the sum is 1/2 or less before modifiers, the fire is ineffective and no roll is made. 18.3 If there are Skirmishers in the target hex, those Skirmishers' Fire Values are deducted from the firing side's Skirmisher Fire Value. Do not count Disorganized or Routed Skirmishers. 18.4 Skirmishers that are Disorganized, Routed or Out of Command (24.2.1) may not fire. Skirmishers in a hex where Close Combat has been initiated may not fire, nor can Skirmishers fire into a hex with an initiated Close Combat. No Skirmisher Fire may take place at night. 18.5 If over-stacked, a maximum of one full Skirmisher may fire out of a hex. Note that Skirmishers may never fire at other Skirmishers. They must use Close Combat to engage each other. 18.6 The result of a Hit depends on the Lead Unit type in the target hex:

A Hit on cavalry causes an M-1 result and a Commander Loss Check (20.1.1).
A Hit on infantry causes an M-1 result and one Straggler.
A Hit on artillery causes an M-1 result and one gun point loss. Note that Skirmishers can choose to target artillery separately, even if the artillery is not the top unit in the stack (14.2.4).

Sidebar

Note : Note the subtle differences between this and Reaction Charges. Artillery units are trying to conserve ammunition and won't be firing at fleeing units. Cavalry, on the other hand, sits around waiting just for these kinds of targets of opportunity.

Example: A C morale unit in Column enters Close Combat with a stack containing a Light 2 gun points battery. At that instant the defender choses to fire Opportunity Fire (according to 17.4.2). This OF is a Cannister fire and is resolved at range 1 using a fire value of 2. Because it is a Cannister fire, the Column modifier doesn't apply. Nor does any terrain modifier. The defender rolls two dice and scores 1 and 5, leading to 1 M-2 and M-1. This combines in a net result of 1 M-3. The Column routs. Note that if a 1-rated or better Commander was with the attacker, the result would only have been 1 M-1.

Most light troops in the Napoleonic wars only worked very closely with their parent units. These pickets and scouting parties are not included in this system. Rather a Skirmisher counter rather represent various kinds of self-supporting skirmisher lines with troopers moving back and forth between the firing and supporting lines and capable of handling more independent tactics. Also note that having a certian number of riflemen with this or that funky plume in one's ranks does not make a Skirmisher counter. What matters is training and the ability to sustain an effort.

Example: Two French Skirmishers with a total Fire Value of 4 fire at a Spanish unit stacked with a Skirmisher with a Fire Value of 1. The French Skirmishers will hit on a roll of 1-3.

19.0 Village Fighting

Fighting in towns and villages had a special dynamic during the Napoleonic Wars. In early battles, towns and villages were mostly ignored. Later on, as artillery became the dominant battlefield arm, infantry sought the protection of villages and Commanders became fixated on taking and maintaining possession of these now critical positions. There are numerous accounts of towns changing hands half a dozen times or more during a battle. 19.1 Town/Village hexes are Hindering terrain (so no Cavalry Charges), and offer positive modifiers against Fire Combat. ZoIs do not extend into Town/Village hexes. 19.2 As an exception to 17.2, only 1 gun point may fire from a Town/Village hex.

19.3 Infantry units in Line formation that move into Town/Village hexes automatically become DG. This takes place before Close Combat. However, infantry units in Town/ Village hexes may only Rally (21.5) if in Line formation (BL can go away as normal). The attacker also gets a negative Check to Stand modifier if the defender is in Line. 19.4 As an exception to 8.4, a unit in March Column that attacks in Close Combat into a Town/Village hex is treated as a Combat Column, even if that nation is not normally allowed to use Combat Columns.

19.5 Close Combat in Town/Village hexes uses a different procedure than regular Close Combat. Only the attacker checks to stand, using the usual modifiers. If he fails, the result is a Defender Won result as usual. If he succeeds, the result is automatically an Attacker Won result. The defender never checks to stand in village fighting, and there are no Firefights. Unlike regular Close Combat, the attacker can not change facing after combat. 19.5.1 If the attacker won the Close Combat and is in Column formation, he may continue his mad rush through the streets. Immediately after resolving the Close Combat, the attacker may move into another frontal hex, if it is also a Town/Village hex. No facing change is allowed in this rush. If this hex contains enemy units, resolve another Close Combat as per above, otherwise, just move into the hex. 19.5.1.1 The attacking unit can continue to move and/or attack in this way as long as

It does not Rout
It stays within Command Range
It stays in Town/Village hexes
It does not enter a friendly occupied hex
Rule 15.1.2 is not violated. The attacker is never required to move into or attack another hex. 19.5.1.2 French columns can change formation per 26.5 at the end of the rush. 19.5.2 Skirmisher vs Skirmisher Close Combats do not use these rules, they resolve their Close Combats as per 15.4.4.1, even when in Town/Village hexes. A Skirmisher being attacked by Infantry DOES use these rules.

Example: The French 6th Light attacks the lone Austrian Skirmishers in Casteggio. The French attack across a bridge, so they are in March Column, but March Columns are treated as Combat Columns in village fighting [19.4]. The attacker has to check to stand. The only modifier here is -1 for Skirmisher disadvantage. The French player rolls a 4 -1 =3 and passes. The attackers - the French - have won. The Austrian player rolls 4 for losses and 2(7) becomes 1 (halved casualties for C size troops and Skirmishers ignore stragglers). The reduced Skirmisher routs 6 hexes away. The French losses are 1(3) M-1 (the roll is a 5).

The French are now Shaken but move forward to continue their rush for Casteggio. They now attack the Austrian Jägers, led by O'Reilly. The French player has to check to stand and this time, his men are Shaken (-1) his enemies are in Line (-1). The 6th Light's morale rating is B and it needs to roll at least 4 to pass, but it rolls a 3. The French fall back to the first village hex conquered.

The loss roll is a 1 (+1 for a Column attacking a Line) so the result is 1(2) M-1. But having rolled a 1 (before modification), they benefit from a Bloodlust result. The casualties are still 1(2), but their morale changes to BL (SH +2). The Austrian player rolls a 3 and only suffers one straggler, but he rolls a 11 for the Commander losses. O'Reilly is killed! Although the French are now Bloodlusted, they can't attack again because of [15.1.2] and because they didn't win the Close Combat [19.5.1].

Sidebar

Fighting in villages and towns was a confused mess during this era. Troops trained in the 17th Century linear tradition avoided built-up areas. As artillery became more powerful, however, possession of villages became more and more crucial as they came to serve as bastions and screens. The trouble with villages was that while they offered good protection to dispersed troops, the same dispersed troops could not generate enough firepower to halt a determined attack. Hence, an attack on a village - by a battering-ram column - that was not stopped by walls or road blocks would invariably succeed and crash down the main street, flush out the dispersed defenders. Then, when the column came to a halt and the troops started to disperse in search of protection or to play hide and seek with what was left of the defenders, it turned into a mirror image of the enemy it had just defeated and became very vulnerable to a counter-attack.

OLDER GAMES Marengo : Treat all the Walled Farm/Village hexes in Marengo as Town/Village hexes. None of them should be considered to be Fortified Terrain

disadvantage. The French player rolls a 4 -1 =3 and passes. The attackers - the French - have won. The Austrian player rolls 4 for losses and 2(7) becomes 1 (halved casualties for C size troops and Skirmishers ignore stragglers).The reduced Skirmisher routs 6 hexes away. The French losses are 1(3) M-1 (the roll is a 5).

The French are now Shaken but move forward to continue their rush for Casteggio. They now attack the Austrian Jägers, led by O'Reilly. The French player has to check to stand and this time, his men are Shaken (-1) his enemies are in Line (-1). The 6th Light's morale rating is B and it needs to roll at a 3 and only suffers one straggler, but to the first village hex conquered. he rolls a 11 for the Commander losses. O'Reilly is killed! Although the French The loss roll is a 1 (+1 for a Column attacking a are now Bloodlusted, they can't attack again because of [15.1.2] and because (before modification), they benefit from a Bloodlust they didn't win the Close Combat [19.5.1]. changes to BL (SH +2). The Austrian player rolls

20.0 Combat Results

20.1 General

Combat can result in Stragglers, Permanent Casualties, Commander Losses, and Morale Changes. For the first two, see the separate rules sections below. For Morale Changes, see 21.3. 20.1.1 Commander Losses. Any time a stack with a Commander takes Permanent Casualties or Stragglers (excluding non-combat losses, see 20.3.1) as well as when cavalry is hit by Skrimisher fire, roll two dice for each Commander in the stack and read the result as "2 through 12". If the result is 11 or 12, a Commander casualty has occurred. See 25.4.

20.2 Permanent Casualties

Permanent Casualties are non-recoverable step-losses to a unit. These are taken by the Lead Unit. Exception : Skirmishers CAN be used to absorb losses, even when it is not the Lead Unit, at the owning player's option. Only "even" casualties called for by the Combat Tables can be taken by Skirmishers (the first, third etc. loss must be taken by the Lead Unit). Take all Permanent Casualties before recording Stragglers. 20.2.1 Record infantry and cavalry Permanent Casualties on the Loss Charts. Mark off these losses as they occur and adjust strength levels accordingly. Artillery units use Gun Point markers placed under the unit counter. A given casualty is the number of Gun Points eliminated. A full strength Skirmisher takes a Permanent Casualty by flipping to its reduced side. A reduced Skirmisher is eliminated by a Permanent Casualty.

20.3 Stragglers

Stragglers are troops temporarily lost from their units through combat stress and exertion. Unlike Permanent Casualties, Stragglers can be recovered to rebuild a unit's strength. Only infantry units suffer Straggler losses. Artillery, cavalry, and Skirmisher units never suffer lossed due to Stragglers. Apply Straggler results to the top infantry unit of the stack, whether it was the Lead Unit or not. If there are no infantry units in the stack, the Straggler losses are ignored.

20.3.1 Stragglers from non-combat causes

In certain instances, infantry units can suffer Stragglers from non-combat causes. Infantry units retreating into Prohibited terrain lose all their remaining strength as Stragglers (21.4.2). In addition, units executing Emergency Withdrawals (6.6.3) or Forced Marches (12.5.6) must check for Straggler losses, by making a Morale Check (21.2). If the unit fails its check it suffers 1 Straggler loss.

20.3.2 Straggler Recovery

Units can attempt to recover Stragglers in the Rally Phase of each friendly Player Turn. Units that fulfill the conditions in the box to the right can attempt to do so: Procedure: Make a Morale Check (21.2) subject to the modifiers listed in the Straggler Recovery portion of the Morale Check Table. If the unit passes the check, it recovers a Straggler. An A or B morale unit that rolls an unmodified 6 on a Straggler Recovery check recovers two Stragglers instead of one. Erase recovered Stragglers from the Loss Chart. If a unit is completely eliminated, but part of its strength has been lost due to Stragglers, it can re-enter play through Straggler Recovery. When eliminated, place the unit 5 turns ahead of the current turn on the Turn Record Track. When the Turn Record Marker reaches that turn the player may begin attempting Straggler Recovery for the unit in the Rally Phase of each of the player turns. Once the unit recovers one of its Stragglers it is returned to play by placing it in any hex which fulfills the conditions for Straggler Recovery. If such a hex does not currently exist, Straggler Recovery can not be attempted by off-map units. See 25.4.6 for the applicability of Commander benefits to such units.

20.4 Marking Losses and Stragglers

Each brigade has a row on the Loss Chart. Mark Permanent Casualties with X's and Stragglers with /'s. Keep Permanent Casualties to the left of Stragglers. Remember, only infantry units lose Stragglers—other unit types ignore these losses.

Sidebar

Example: A stack of one Skirmisher and one infantry unit suffers 3 Permanent Casualties. The player options are: apply all casualties to the infantry unit or, apply one Permanent Casualty to the Skirmisher, and the rest to the infantry.

Stragglers represent men leaving formation for different reasons, be it fleeing in terror or to help a wounded friend to get to a dressing station. Given time most of them would find their way back to their units. (Elite troops tend to return to the flags quicker and find far fewer excuses to leave them. In effect these units suffer more "hard" casualties as the men don't have the sense to stay out of harm's way.) Artillery and cavalry do not suffer stragglers in these rules as a lot of the damage they suffer falls on animals that can not be coaxed back into action with "hey, it is just a flesh wound!"

Straggler Recovery Requirements (20.3.2)

The unit is at least 4 hexes away from all enemy units. At night, two hexes is sufficient.

The unit must have a Morale State of Normal or BL.

The unit must be In Command per 6.11.

The unit is not in a Command under Engage Orders.

The unit has not expended any MPs in the current turn.

The unit has not participated in any form of combat.

21.0 Morale

Morale determines how well a unit withstands the stress of battle. Each unit has a Morale Rating printed on it. This rating is permanent and does not change during the game. Units are rated A through E, from best to worst.

21.1 Morale States

Unlike Morale Ratings, Morale States represent temporary conditions of confusion, fear, or anger. A stack can have only one Morale State at a time. A Morale Change result inflicted on a stack affects all units in it. Place a Morale State Marker atop a stack to show its Morale State (Normal has no marker). When units in different Morale States stack at the end of movement or retreat, the stack adopts the worst Morale State of the constituent units.

21.2 Morale Checks

Some rules require that a unit or stack makes a Morale Check. Check the unit's Morale Rating on the Morale Check Table. To make a Morale Check, the unit (Lead Unit if a stack) rolls a die. If the result is equal to or higher than the number given by the table, the unit passes its check. If it is lower, it fails the check. The only modifier to a Morale Check roll is a +1 to the roll if the stack contains a Commander with a rating of 2 or better.

21.3 Morale Changes

Morale Changes occur as a result of combat and numerous other causes. Morale Changes are expressed as an M followed by a number (usually negative, but sometimes positive). The number is the number of shifts downwards (or upwards if positive) the unit suffers, per the Morale State order above. 21.3.1 Morale Changes that would shift the Morale State of a unit below Routed, or above Blood Lust have no additional effect. 21.3.2 A brigade that becomes Wrecked suffers an instant additional M-1 Morale Change. A Commander Loss also causes an M-1 result.

21.3.3 Blood Lust

Certain combat tables are marked with a bullet "•". When an unmodified 1 is rolled on these tables the checking unit benefits from an M+2 Morale Change instead of the Morale Change Result the table indicates, if it is not Wrecked and has a Morale Rating of A or B. C morale units also get this benefit if stacked with a 1-rated or better Commander. This is called a Blood Lust result.

21.4 Retreats

At the end of a Close Combat or Cavalry Charge, one side or the other will always retreat. In addition, a unit that becomes Routed immediately retreats 6 hexes. (Exception: Follow- on Charges, see 16.2.7.2, and Skirmishers, see 16.3.3) Retreats are measured in hexes, not Movement Points. 21.4.1 The first two hexes of a retreat must be further away from the cause of the retreat, unless the cause was farther away than 2 hexes (i.e. artillery fire). In the case of a Close Combat, the first hex has to be the hex it came from for the attacker. For the defender, it must not be to, or adjacent to, the hex the attacker came from. No hex entered during the retreat may be closer to enemy combat units within 4 hexes than the previous hex. 21.4.2 If a unit cannot retreat the required number of hexes, due to the enemy or Prohibited terrain, it is removed. For infantry and cavalry units, the remainder of its strength is marked off as Permanent Casualties (exception: Infantry units that can trace a path through Prohibited terrain mark off the remainder as Stragglers instead). Infantry units may still come back per 20.3.2. 21.4.3 A stack suffering a retreat can retreat as a stack or split up as desired. Retreating units can end up stacked with other non-retreating units. The retreating unit is placed on top of the stack. 21.4.4 If a Routed stack retreats through (without ending stacked with) a hex containing another friendly stack, the stack being retreated through has its Morale State reduced by one. Other retreating units do not affect stationary units in the hexes they pass through.

Sidebar

Note: We did away with the very detailed morale checks to save time. Your time. Fascinating as such a detailed model might be, it will still boil down to a "roll 1-2 to succeed" result most of the time.

Morale States in order of increasingly poor performance are:

Blood Lust (BL) - A state of high excitement.

Normal - A unit's normal state.

Shaken (Sh) - Some unease in the ranks.

Disorganized (DG) - A partial breakdown of order.

Routed (R) - A collapse of order.

A Routed unit suffers under a number of restrictions.

Routed is considered a formation (a mob of panicking men) in addition to being a Morale State. It is considered to have all-around rear facing.

Rallying a Routed unit is voluntary. The owning player may prefer the unit to run away from the enemy instead of recovering to a Disorganized state in a tight spot.

A Routed infantry or cavalry unit is considered Wrecked (21.6) and suffers the effects of that condition.

A unit that becomes Routed, from whatever cause, is immediately retreated (exceptions: Cavalry Charges, 16.2.7.2, 16.3.1) 6 hexes away from the closest enemy unit. This retreat is not inhibited by Command Range restrictions.

Routed units cannot move voluntarily during the Movement Phase. A Routed unit that is less than 6 hexes from any enemy units at the end of the friendly Rally Phase is immediately retreated until it is 6 hexes away from the closest enemy unit. Otherwise, it stays in place.

21.4.5 If a stack formed by a retreat exceeds the stacking limit of a hex, the stack has its Morale State reduced by 1. The stack must be broken up at the first opportunity (in the next Movement Phase, or during Rout Movement (21.4)). 21.4.6 Artillery units forced to retreat must limber to do so. If Unlimbered artillery is forced to retreat in Close Combat or a Cavalry Charge, it must roll on the Gun Loss Table to see if any additional Gun Points are lost. Roll once for the entire stack, not for each artillery unit. 21.4.7 A retreating unit that enters terrain that would cause it to become Shaken or DG suffers the effect just as a voluntarily moving unit would. See 12.2.5.

21.5 Rally

During the player's Rally Phase, friendly stacks attempt to Rally if in any Morale State other than Normal. Stacks in a ZoI (11.0) can not Rally. Infantry units in Town/Village hexes may only Rally if in Line formation. See the Rally Sequence to the right.

21.6 Wrecked Brigades and Divisions

After taking enough losses, or when Routed, a brigade becomes Wrecked. Wrecked brigades suffer negative modifiers on the combat tables and increase the chance of their formation suffering Attack Stoppage. Wrecked cavalry cannot execute Cavalry Charges (Reaction or regular). After enough of a division's brigades become Wrecked the division becomes Wrecked. Artillery units, HQs and Commanders never become Wrecked. 21.6.1 When a brigade has all the squares to the left of the "Wrecked" check mark on the Loss Chart filled with Permanent Casualties and Stragglers, the brigade is Wrecked. In addition, if a brigade is Routed, it is considered Wrecked as long as it is Routed. When a brigade becomes Wrecked, mark a line through the brigade's identification on the Loss Chart and mark one of the division's squares with an X. When a brigade becomes Wrecked it suffers an additional M-1 Morale Change in addition to any Morale Change occurring at the same time from combat. 21.6.2 When all the squares to the left of a division's Wrecked line on the Loss Chart are marked, the division is Wrecked. Circle the division's identification on the chart. Unwrecked brigades in the division are still considered unwrecked. 21.6.3 Wrecked brigades and divisions can recover from Wrecked status if brigades rally from being Routed or recover enough Stragglers. If this occurs, remove the Wrecked markings from the Loss Chart.

21.6.4 Brigades being sent on Independent Orders or Reattached between divisions may change the number of brigades in a division. This affects the number of brigades that must be Wrecked before the division is considered Wrecked, and is handled as follows: For each brigade detached from a division, reduce the number of Wrecked brigades needed to wreck the division by one. For each additional brigade attached to a division, increase the number of brigades needed to wreck the division by one. If the attached brigade is Wrecked it is, of course, counted towards the total of Wrecked brigades.

Sidebar

Rally Sequence A. Remove BL markers from all stacks not adjacent to at least one enemy unit. B. For each remaining stack marked BL, roll one die. On a roll of 1-2 remove the BL counter, otherwise the unit remains Blood Lusted. C. Remove all Shaken markers from stacks not in enemy ZoI. D. Flip all DG markers to Shaken on stacks not in an enemy ZoI. E. If desired, make a Morale Check for Routed units not in an enemy ZoI. Use the Lead Unit to check. Stacks that pass the check remove their Routed markers and are marked with a DG counter. The units in the stack can adopt any allowed formation and facing (Exception: Cavalry is automatically Blown). The player can elect NOT to attempt to rally Routed stacks (since it might be a bad idea to recover to DG status close to the enemy). F. Any remaining Routed stacks that are within 6 hexes of enemy units, retreat as described in 21.4.

Example (left): Aspern is held by Molitor's division. The Austrian VI Corps attacks and is repulsed, but Molitor's 37th Line suffers 2 hard casualties and 1 Straggler (line one).

The I Austrian Corps now attacks. The assault is again repulsed but the 37th suffers another 2 Permanent Casualties and 1 Straggler (line two). The 37th Line is now Wrecked, but not permanently so, due to the possibility of recovering Stragglers.

Example: A three brigade division which will wreck when two of three brigades are Wrecked detaches a brigade on Independent Orders. The division now only needs to have one of the two remaining brigades Wrecked to be Wrecked itself. If the same division had instead been brought up to four brigade strength, it would take three Wrecked brigades to wreck the division.

22.0 Cavalry Special Rules

Cavalry is differentiated into Light and Heavy classes, which have different movement and combat capabilities. The class of a cavalry unit is shown on the counter. Heavy Cavalry is designated by a star in the center of its symbol.

22.1 Cavalry Withdrawal

If, during movement, an infantry and/or artillery stack moves adjacent to an enemy cavalry unit, that cavalry unit has the choice of immediately Reaction Charging the moving unit, or withdrawing 6-12 hexes (owner's choice of distance, the cavalry does not become Blown from the withdrawal). The cavalry unit can NOT choose to remain in its current hex. If the moving unit is in a flank or rear hex, and a Reaction Charging unit fails its Morale Check (16.5.5), the cavalry unit is forced to withdraw. 22.1.1 Blown, DG and Routed cavalry, or cavalry units that can not Reaction Charge for whatever reason are forced to withdraw. 22.1.2 If an infantry unit initiates Close Combat against a cavalry unit (that started the Movement Phase adjacent to the infantry) the cavalry must withdraw as per above. The attacking unit may continue to move, but must still spend the +2 MPs to initiate the Close Combat. 22.1.3 Limbered Horse Artillery is considered cavalry for this rule only, and thus must withdraw when enemy infantry or artillery moves adjacent.

22.2 Blown Cavalry

Once committed, cavalry units need time to regain their composure and organization. Cavalry becomes Blown after participating in a Cavalry Charge (exception: 16.3.3, 26.4.1 and 16.4.3.2), and when rallied from Routed Morale State. 22.2.1 When a unit becomes Blown, flip it (so the Blown side is face-up). Routed cavalry that rallies is automatically Blown. Note that except for British cavalry (26.4.1) and Cossacks (26.6.3), a cavalry unit becomes blown AFTER retreating at the end of a charge, not before the retreat. 22.2.2 Blown cavalry cannot Charge, and has a reduced Movement Allowance. 22.2.3 Blown cavalry units in a Normal or better Morale State can attempt to recover during the Rally Phase's Cavalry Recovery Segment. Even cavalry which became Blown in the same turn as the Rally Phase can attempt to recover. Only cavalry units belonging to the phasing player may attempt recovery. Individually make a Morale Check (21.2) for each Blown unit. If the result is a pass, the unit recovers, flip it back to its non-Blown side. Otherwise, there is no effect and the unit remains Blown.

23.0 Artillery Special Rules

Artillery is defined by type and mobility class. Artillery type is Light or Heavy. Heavy guns are 12 lb (or more). Light guns are everything smaller. Heavy artillery is designated with a black Gun Point number and Light artillery with a white Gun Point number. This designation is only used to determine which Artillery Fire Value Table to use for Fire Combat. Artillery mobility class is defined as Foot or Horse. This designation determines the unit's movement characteristics. Horse artillery moves faster than regular artillery, and can, when Limbered, execute Cavalry Withdrawal (22.1.3). Horse artillery is marked on their counter with the horse head, Foot artillery is not.

23.1 Limbered and Unlimbered Artillery

Artillery is severely limited in its ability to move and fire at the same time. This is shown by its two formations. Limbered artillery can not fire, while Unlimbered artillery can only change facing, not move. 23.1.1 Artillery must limber to retreat even one hex. Limbering during a Close Combat or Cavalry Charge requires a roll on the Gun Loss Table. The Gun Loss Table only affects artillery. 23.1.2 At the moment of Formation Change, artillery can freely change facing 180 degrees (exactly, not up to 180 degrees) without additional MP costs. Unlimbered artillery can expend MPs only to change facing or to limber.

Sidebar

The Napoleonic Era is the last era in which cavalry was good for anything but scouting and looking cool, so enjoy the ride. Properly used shock cavalry could still ride down anything in its path, but most charges went down in clouds of cannister. Truly devastating charges, such as those at Albuera or Medelin, were rare and took both timing and luck to pull off. Note that cavalry being "heavy" has nothing to do with armor-plated chests. It is rather about tactical role, training and sheer balls. Heavy cavalry used big men on big horses and came on at a trot, slowly enough to give you time to think "they will ride me down" a lot of times.

Example: A charge leaves a cavalry unit Blown and DG. At the end of that turn it recovers to being SH while remaining Blown. At the end of next turn it recovers from being SH and can then try to recover from being Blown.

OLDER GAMES Austerlitz : The following units are Heavy Cavalry units (hence all others are considered Light!) French: 1-1HC-C, 2-1HC-C, 3-1HC- C, 1-2HC-C, 2-2HC-C, 1c-IG. Allied: 2b- Gd, 3-Rgt, 1,2-1-Cv Marengo : Light Cavalry is designated by a single triangle, Heavy Cavalry by two triangles.

Horse artillery can move about and withdraw faster as it has enough mounts for the entire crew to ride. Beyond this level of detail cannon is abstracted, but things such as crew skill have been factored into the conversion from guns to Gun Points. In the case of very light pieces, a greater number of guns make up each gun point. "Battalion guns", light guns dragged along by individual battalions, are ignored in this system, as they were generally only useful for making encouraging noises.

2CO

23.2 Detached Batteries

Unless forbidden in the game specific rules, the owning player can form detached batteries of 1 or 2 Gun Points using Detached Artillery unit counters and numeric Gun Point markers. Detachment and reattachment of Gun Points does not cost MPs. These player-made artillery units function as any other and can reattach with any artillery unit of the same type and class, as long as the resulting battery contains no more than its original Gun Point value (or 2 for a Detached battery). Detached Artillery unit counters are not designated by type and class; players should make a note defining these units by Type, Mobility Class, and Morale Rating to avoid confusion. Suggestion: Face the numeric Gun Point marker toward the front of the unit top to show Light, back 180 degrees to show Heavy (Heavy Points "lie down"). Also, left can be used for Light-Horse Artillery and right for Heavy-Horse Artillery.

24.0 Skirmishers

Infantry units in any formation that have uncrossed Skirmisher boxes can release Skirmishers before they move. Except when Routed, Skirmishers are always in Skirmish formation. There are three types of Skirmishers: Normal, Elite (all British and French Skirmishers, unless otherwise noted) and Rifles. Skirmishers have a full strength and reduced strength side. Their Morale Rating and Fire Value is printed on the counter.

24.1 Releasing Skirmishers

Unless Routed or Disorganized, units with one or more unmarked Skirmisher boxes on their Loss Chart can release Skirmishers. Skirmishers are released during the Movement Phase, before the parent unit moves. Place a Skirmisher unit in the same hex as the releasing unit, and mark off one of the unit's Skirmisher boxes. Once placed, the Skirmisher can move freely. Skirmisher release does not cost any Movement Points.

24.2 Skirmisher Movement

Skirmishers have all-around frontal facing. Skirmishers have a Movement Allowance of 6, but may exceed this MA if they move the entire phase stacked with an infantry unit in Column, "tagging along". Skirmisher movement is severely restricted at night (see 27.1.5). 24.2.1 Normal and Elite Skirmishers can never voluntary move further than 2 hexes from a friendly non-Skirmisher unit. Rifle Skirmishers can move up to 3 hexes away from a friendly unit. The friendly unit does not have to be the unit that released the Skirmisher. The distance must be traced through hexes the Skirmisher could enter. Should a Skirmisher end up outside of this range, through retreats or eliminations, it must attempt to move back within range during the next friendly Movement Phase. Skirmishers are unhindered by Command Range limits. 24.2.2 Skirmishers may enter Close Combat as an attacker if: A) they are stacked with an infantry unit, or B) the defender is a lone Skirmisher (see 15.4.4.1). 24.2.3 Skirmishers may not move adjacent to cavalry unless the cavalry is Wrecked, Blown, Disorganized, Routed, or otherwise unable to charge into the hex entered. 24.2.4 Skirmishers adjacent to artillery block fire through the Skirmisher. See 17.1.4.

24.3 Skirmisher Casualties

If a Skirmisher takes a Casualty, flip the counter over to its reduced strength side. If it is already reduced, eliminate it. Skirmishers stacked with other units can not be the target unit for fire, but they CAN be used to absorb Permanent Casualties at the owning player's option. Only "even" casualties can be taken by Skirmishers (the first, third, etc. loss must be taken by the target unit of the hex).

24.4 Recovering Skirmishers

At the end of a friendly Movement Phase, a unit can recover a full strength Skirmisher or two reduced Skirmishers stacked with it, provided the recovering unit has at least one Skirmisher box crossed out. On recovery, remove the Skirmisher unit and erase the mark in the unit's Skirmish box on the Loss Charts. A single reduced Skirmisher can not be recovered by itself, it must pair up with another reduced Skirmisher to count as a single full Skirmisher.

Sidebar

OLDER GAMES All: Guards artillery units have an A Morale Rating, Horse artillery units a B Morale Rating and Foot artillery units a C Morale Rating. Austerlitz : An L after the Gun Point number means the guns are Light, and H means Heavy guns. Marengo : Light guns are shown with one white triangle with a red outline and a gray box around the Gun Point number. Heavy guns have a yellow triangle in addition to the white triangle and also have their Gun Points encased in a black box.

Skirmishers were a substantial threat to artillery as they were too dispersed to suffer much damage from the guns while they sniped away at gunners and team horses. To survive, the gunners needed either protection from skirmishers of their own or to deploy among formed troops. Cavalry, on the other hand, could always slaughter skirmishers if they could catch up with them.

Skirmishers can no longer out-shoot infantry as they could in the old rules. (Once, a raw Spanish division was Wrecked by Skirmishers alone, but that in an extreme case.) In real life, skirmishers could pester formed infantry forever, not to wreck it, but to keep it busy or slow it down. The skirmishers were in effect "the pinners" in the Napoleonic infantry equation as they could keep this low-intensity activity up for hours without being burned out. The most effective countermeasure against them was to have skirmishers of your own and as long as both sides' skirmishers were reasonably even in numbers and skill they could fight each other for hours.

24.4.1 Skirmishers as Line Companies

If the player wishes he may instead use a Skirmisher recovered per above to erase one Permanent Casualty from an infantry unit. However, this means that the Skirmisher can never be used again. Any infantry unit may do this, even one that didn't have any Skirmisher boxes to begin with. If at the end of any friendly Movement Phase, a unit has taken Permanent Casualties and has unreleased Skirmishers, these Skirmishers can be "put in line" by crossing out a Skirmisher box on the Loss Chart and recovering one Permanent Casualy, without having to go through the process of releasing and reabsorbing the Skirmisher.

24.4.2 Skirmisher Combat

Skirmishers can fire in the Fire Phase (18.0), participate in Close Combat (15.4.4) and be bullied around by cavalry (16.3.3).

25.0 Commanders

Commanders represent Divisional and higher officers. Commanders provide Command and Morale benefits for their stacks. Commanders move as any other unit, but have no Combat ability. Commanders can become casualties when they are involved in combat. A player may conduct Artillery or Skirmisher Fire Combat on a hex containing only Commanders in an attempt to generate Commander Losses. Commanders have a Command Rating. They use it for Command functions, Initiative and Rally.

25.1 Effect on Stacking

Commanders do not count for stacking and any number can occupy a hex. A Commander stacked with a unit that retreats, for any reason, may choose to remain in the hex or retreat with the unit.

25.2 Effect on Movement

Commanders move as any unit. They have no facing or formation. If a Commander ends up alone in a hex with an enemy unit, he is immediately displaced to the hex with the nearest unit of his command. Enemy units never eliminate Commanders by entering their hexes.

25.3 Effects on Combat

In Close Combat and Cavalry Charges, participating Commanders usually provide positive modifiers to the Check to Stand rolls and Morale Checks. See 15.2.2, 16.2.4, 16.2.4 and 16.4.1.4.

25.4 Commander Loss and Replacement

When a Commander is stacked with a unit taking losses due to combat (Stragglers or Casualties) a Commander Loss Check must be perfomed. Roll two dice for each Commander in the stack and read the result as "2 through 12". On a roll of 11 or 12, that Commander is lost. Any units stacked with a Commander that is lost suffers an M-1 Morale Change result. 25.4.1 In Skirmisher Fire make a Commander Loss Check if the fire was a Hit on a cavalry unit, despite the fact that the cavalry unit does not take any losses. 25.4.2 Remove Commanders that become Casualties from play. (They may come back, though. See 25.4.7.)

25.4.3 Replace all Commander losses immediately. Replace Army and Corps Commanders with their senior subordinate (usually listed in the game specific rules, otherwise the Commander with the most stars, owner chooses in case of ties). 25.4.4 The backs of Division and Corps Commanders are printed with generic replacements. If you promote a Division Commander to fill a vacancy, use the generic replacement back of the Corps Commander to fill the divisional position. 25.4.5 When a Division Commander becomes a casualty, flip the counter to its replacement side and place it with another stack of the division (i.e. not in the same hex). If no such hex is available, the replacement appears where the Commander was lost. 25.4.6 If a Commander's stack is destroyed, but he escapes unharmed, place the Commander with the nearest stack of his command that doesn't contain an unresolved Close Combat. If no such stack exists, remove the Commander from play. If an eligible stack under his command should appear later, the Commander appears with the stack. If the stack reappeared due to Straggler Recovery, it DOES get the benefit of being stacked with the Commander for the Morale Check.

Sidebar

In the later part of the wars there were some developments in the use of dispersed infantry that are not covered by these rules. We will tackle them in the games they appear in.

OLDER GAMES In Austerlitz, Marengo and Aspern-Essling, French Skirmishers are considered Elite, and have a B Morale Rating. All other Skirmishers are Normal Skirmishers with a C Morale Rating. Their Fire Values can be found on the Skirmisher Fire Table.

Note : Unlike earlier versions of the NBS- rules, Divison Commanders are not required to stack with one of their brigades.

The rank-stars on the Commanders roughly translate as follows: One Star - Brigadier (General D'Brigade) Two Stars - Major General (General D'Division) Three Stars - Lieutenant General Four Stars - Something very impressive.

The commander casualties are indeed appalling. But during this era of Leadership by Heroic Example it was not uncommon for a division to lose its divisional commander and all its brigade and regimental commanders in one thirty minute engagement. It can actually be said that this brutal attrition cut short all chances of serious tactical developments during the era as too many mid level officers died before they could pass on any new ideas.

Most of these generals were tough customers. The worst lead-magnet of the era was probably Marshal Oudinot who was wounded over twenty times by bullets, shrapnel and even a collapsing roof. Another medical miracle was Katusov who managed to survive being shot through his head twice without dying.

25.4.7 Recovering from wounds (Multi-day scenarios only)

In scenarios stretching over more than one day, there is a chance that Commanders who have become Casualties may recover from their wounds and join the fighting again. During the Rally Phase of each 1 AM Player Turn, roll a die for each of the Phasing Players Commanders who are Casualties. On a roll of 1 or 2 the Commander has died and may not be rolled for again for obvious reasons. On a roll of 3-4, the Commander is still out of the game but may recover on subsequent nights. On a roll of 5-6 the Commander has recovered enough to join the fighting again. If the Commander is a Corps Commander he is placed on his HQ and his replacement can move back to his Division. If a Divisional Commander returns, he shows upp with a unit of his division and his replacement is removed.

25.5 Fighters

Some Commanders, referred to as "Fighters", have an F on their counter. Fighters are Commanders more at home leading from the front than handling staff-work. Fighters are considered to have a Command Rating 2 higher (but never higher than 4) than printed for the purposes of everything except Order Acceptance, Initiative and Attack Stoppage.

26.0 Special Units and National

Characteristics

26.1 Levies

Some units that fought in Napoleonic battles had only been in existence for days and had minimal military training. These are designated as "Levies." Levies are marked with "Lvy" on the counter as well as in the Loss Charts and suffer the following penalties: A . They may never form Square. B . They pay 4 MPs to change formation.

26.2 Wagons

Some scenarios include wagons that represent supply trains and such. 26.2.1 Wagons have a Movement Allowance of three and use the Foot artillery column on the Movement Table. They do not have a facing and do not count for stacking, but a hex can only contain one wagon at a time. A wagon unit cannot voluntarily enter a ZoI. 26.2.2 Skirmishers cannot enter hexes containing enemy wagons unless stacked with a non- Skirmisher unit. Road Movement (12.5) may not be used into or out of a hex containing a wagon unit. 26.2.3 Wagons are destroyed if an enemy non-Skirmisher unit ends its movement in its hex. This is an exception to the normal rule that you cannot enter a hex occupied by an enemy unit. Wagons are not affected by Artillery or Skirmisher Fire, and are unaffected by Morale States.

26.3 Rifles

A few Skirmishers were armed with rifles. Specified brigades (indicated by circular Skirmisher-boxes on the Loss Chart) may release special Skirmishers called "rifles". These are indicated with a bugle printed on their counters. Only brigades that have Rifle boxes may release or recover them. Rifle Skirmishers get a –1 modifier on Skirmisher Fire die rolls.

26.4 British Cavalry

If British cavalry charges infantry and the infantry stands, the cavalry may not attempt to Breakoff unless stacked with a Commander, go directly to the cavalry Repulsed resolution. If stacked with a Commander, British cavalry checks for Breakoff normally, but ignores any bonus for being stacked with a Commander with a Command Rating of 2 or better. 26.4.1 British cavalry becomes blown BEFORE executing its 6-12 hex retreat after a Cavalry Charge (thus making them a tempting target for Reaction Charges during the retreat).

26.5 French Columns

If a French Combat Column wins a Close Combat, it may change formation to Line after resolving the combat. This Formation Change does NOT trigger Reaction Charges or Opportunity Fire.

Sidebar

FIGHTERS IN OLDER GAMES Austerlitz : Bagration, Friant, Katusov (0- side only), Konstantin, Kienmayer, Lannes, Murat, and Oudinot. Marengo : Kaim, Hadik and O'Reilly. Aspern-Essling (Note that their ratings are also changed a bit): Masséna (3F), Bessières (1F), Lasalle (2F), Mouton (3F) and Rapp (3F). For the Austrians, treat all 0 and 1 rated commanders as Fighters.

LOOT

OLDER GAMES Austerlitz : The ammunition wagons do not fall into the "wagon" category and should be removed from the game. They are a leftover from a rule that has since been removed.

Rifles are in the rules as a cosmetic detail to give some edge to elite British troops. They will be a super-weapon when someone can show us more than hazy anecdotal proof that people being shot at by rifles ever noticed the difference between rifled and regular skirmisher fire.

The whole "French Attack Column" –thing is a mess. The "ordre mixte" that pops up now and again in writings on Napoleonic tactics was rarely used. The basic French attack formation was instead a triple-deep line (or a 9-rank column... go figure) that in effect gave a French regiment a third of the frontage of a similar unit in a normal line. It also meant that each enemy battalion would be attacked by an entire regiment, giving an instant 3-1 advantage.

26.6 Cossacks and other Irregular Cavalry

Cossacks are marked with a C in the cavalry symbol. 26.6.1 Units marked as Cossacks may only charge (including Reaction Charge) target stacks that are Disorganized or Routed. 26.6.2 If a Cossack unit is targeted by a Cavalry Charge, it immediately retreats six hexes and then becomes Blown. The charging unit is not Blown, but may not move further or charge again this phase (except for Reaction Charges). 26.6.3 A Cossack unit becomes blown BEFORE executing its 6-12 hex retreat after a Cavalry Charge, not at the end of the retreat.

27.0 Night

While night actions did occur during the Napoleonic Wars, most resulted in spectacular failures. In the game, as in real life, nights are better used for rest and redeployment. Dawn and dusk turns are not considered "night" for the purposes of these rules, they only affect visibility.

27.1 General

27.1.1 Turns at night represent one hour, instead of thirty minutes, giving away half the night to sleep behind the player's back. 27.1.2 Visibility at night is always one hex. 27.1.3 Cavalry cannot charge at night. 27.1.4 Skirmishers may not fire at night. Artillery can only fire Cannister as Opportunity Fire in Close Combat. This means there are no Fire Phases at night. 27.1.5 Skirmishers can only enter hexes that contain friendly non-Skirmisher units or Fortified terrain. If a Skirmisher starts a night turn outside such a hex, it must attempt to move to an allowed hex. Skirmishers can "tag along" with other friendly units that move at night. 27.1.6 Stragglers may be recovered 2 hexes away from enemy units (instead of 4). 27.1.7 Several tables have night modifiers.

27.2 Night and Command

27.2.1 Command Radius (6.13.1) is halved at night for commands with General Orders. Commands with Engage Orders or in No Orders Status have their Command Ranges reduced to 1/4 instead of halved. Units (including entire divisions) caught Out of Command by nightfall may elect to remain where they are instead of trying to move back In Command. This decision is made once and may not be reversed. If a unit that elects to stay in place during the night has a retreat result inflicted on it, it has to try to get back In Command. 27.2.2 Any Engage Order that is to be implemented at night must be rewritten as a number of Independent Orders that must be accepted individually for each division in the corps (even if the corps in question is normally forbidden to use Independent Orders for its divisions).. These new orders must of course conform to the corps' old order. 27.2.3 During the Command Phase of the last dusk turn any corps currently under Engage Orders must rewrite these as a number of instantly accepted Independent Orders for each division, conforming to the corps' old order.

EXAMPLE In the middle of the night, the French Marines try a surprise attack. They start their movement along the river (1 MP) and then spend 4 MP entering three risky hexes. Thus they arrive on the rear of the San Juan brigade with 3MPs remaining. This is enough to enter in Close Combat.

Now that they are adjacent to an enemy unit, the french player has to determine if the marines have become lost. As they have crossed three risky hexes he needs to roll 4 or more. He rolls a 2. The Marines have gone astray. The spanish player moves the marines back to the last non-risky hex and then moves them on a 4 MP detour. He leads them to the right so that, when the french player takes back control of his Marines, they cannot reach the San Juan regiment.

Sidebar

5-R

Cossacks were not keen on charging formed troops simply because they had no idea how to approach formations of that density. While we are at exotic cavalry, note that the lance was a trendy weapon handed out left and right to recruits who seldom got the time to learn how to handle it properly.

Anyone thinking these rules are to harsh or random has probably never been out in the country at night. There was no electricity in 1806 and unless you had the moon to help you find your way you had to torch things if you wanted to see anything. Still armies tried to fight in darkness, mostly in built-up areas and with rather mixed results. There are even cases of cavalry trying to charge in darkness but these are all spectacular failures.

Arroyo de Escobar Arroyo de Escobar

27.3 Night and Movement (Optional)

During night turns normal movement (including withdrawals, but not retreats) may only be carried out

along any type of Road or watercourse (hex-edge or in-hex)
into hexes containing any type of buildings ("points of interests", smaller groups of buildings, will do).
into hexes containing friendly units that do not move during the turn. Any other kind of hex is considered a 'Risky Hex' for night-movement purposes.

27.3.1 Getting Lost

As soon as any unit, stack or Commander moving alone finishes moving through a series of Risky Hexes by re-entering non-risky terrain, it ends up adjacent to enemy units, or dawn breaks, roll one die. If the roll is less than or equal to the number of Risky Hexes traversed the unit has gone astray, otherwise the roll has no effect. Note that if the unit moves through Risky Terrain over several turns, you must keep track of where it started and how many MPs it spent in Risky Hexes. A stack gone astray is returned to the last non-Risky Hex along its path and may then be moved by the opposing player. The opposing player may move the stack a number of MPs equal to the number of MPs expended moving through Risky Hexes. He may move the stack in any way he sees fit, except that he may not change the unit's formation (except to limber and unlimber artillery), move the unit illegally, or change facing more than one hex- side before entering each new hex.He is allowed to move the unit Out of Command. Once the opposing player is done moving the unit the Phasing Player may continue moving the unit if it has any remaining MPs.

28.0 Concealed Forces (Optional)

For these rules one will need a set of "Concealment Markers". Basically any kind of counters with numbers on one side will do. You will also need some numbered boxes to hide the units associated with each Concealment Marker.

28.1 Concepts

These rules are based on two concepts:

First, if all counters of a formation are out of enemy LOS it can be turned into a Concealed Force (CF) and be replaced by a single Concealment Marker. CFs in turn can breed Decoy CFs. Second, it takes an unconcealed unit to reveal what is hidden in a CF.

28.2 Marking Concealed Forces

28.2.1 A Concealed Force (CF) is represented on the map by a Concealment Marker.

28.2.2 At the start of any friendly Movement Phase, a player may remove all units of one of his division from the map provided that all of the units are a) in Command and b) outside of enemy LOS and instead place a Concealment Marker on the map with the number down. These units are placed somewhere off the map and out of sight from the other player, preferably next to a number corresponding to the Concealment Marker used. Place the Concealment Marker in the hex where the Divisional Commander used to be.

Units directly subordinate to the concealed division's corps (artillery units as well as the corps HQ and Commander) may conceal themselves in a division's off-map stack at the time it conceals itself, provided they too were within Command Range of the Divisional Commander and outside of enemy LOS. Brigades on Independent Orders may be concealed on their own in this manner. Reinforcements may also enter play concealed if the entry hex fulfils the conditions above.

28.2.3 A CF may not move on the turn it is created unless it is a formation entering as a reinforcement. Otherwise a CF moves at the speed of the slowest unit in the concealed division paying MPs for facing changes and so on. (A Decoy CF may move at any speed the owning player chooses.) A CF may never enter the LOS of a non-CF enemy unit and must always maintain a three-hex distance between itself and any enemy CF or unconcealed enemy unit, regardless of LOS considerations. CFs may never stack with other friendly units or CFs except for Commanders and HQs. Retreating units do not ignore enemy CFs.

Sidebar

Note : Thes rules mess things up a lot. Use them only if you find chaos control enjoyable.

PDF files for Concealment Markers can be found in the NBS section of the MMP webpage. Go to: http://www.gamersarchive. net/theGamers/archive/nbs.htm

28.2.4 At the start of any friendly Movement Phase, before creating new CFs, the player may have his already existing CFs "breed" new Decoy CFs. A Concealment Marker not yet associated with any troops may be placed in each hex with a CF in it, and in the Movement Phase the dummy CF immediately start to behave as any other CF. It may in turn breed new Decoy CFs in the next turn. 28.2.5 A player may never use more Decoys than the number of divisions plus the number of independent cavalry brigades in his army. The number available at any given turn should reflect how many divisions the player has on the table at the moment.

28.3 Revealing Concealed Forces

28.3.1 If a non-CF unit moves into LOS or within two hexes of an enemy CF, the unit must stop while the CF force (if real) deploys according to 28.3.3. If the CF proves to be a Decoy, the Decoy is removed and is available for "breeding" again the next turn. Note that the revealed force may fire Opportunity Fire and conduct Reaction Charges from the instant it is placed on the map, including fire or charges against the very movement that triggered its disclosure. Remember that CFs can never cause enemy CFs to be revealed in this way. 28.2.2 A CF can voluntarily revert to real units only at the start of a friendly Movement Phase, before any movement has taken place. The units are deployed according to 28.3.3. 28.3.3 When, regardless of cause, a CF is revealed, the Concealment Marker is removed and the Commander is placed in the hex. His division then sets up in that and any adjacent hexes while observing the following rules.

No unit may be placed across Prohibited terrain.
If the CF moved in the turn before being revealed, infantry units must be in Column and artillery Limbered and as far as possible placed in Road hexes.
If the CF did not move in the previous turn, its artillery may set up Unlimbered.

28.4 Scouts, Stragglers and Other Activities

28.4.1 At the start of any friendly movement phase a CF may release up to one cavalry unit and/or any number of Skirmishers from the Concealed Force, while the rest of the force remains concealed. CFs containing lone cavalry brigades or just Decoys may of course not do this. The revealed unit(s) are placed on top of the CF counter and may then move up to two hexes away from it, if Skirmishers, and four hexes away if cavalry. (Players may agree to use an anonymous counter to represent a released cavalry unit in order to prevent instant intelligence. The cavalry unit's true identity should then be revealed only if it enters the LOS of an enemy non-CF unit. For those who want to explore these options there are scout counters on the Concealed Forces-PDF.) 28.4.2 Units in CFs may recover Stragglers as in any other situation, counting enemy CFs as enemy units when calculating the distance to enemy units. Commanders may affect up to AAA levels worth of units in the CF. If a CF force marches, either note the number of turns it does so and roll for Stragglers for all the marches the instant the force is revealed, or roll for Stragglers each turn. A force may not roll for Straggler recovery on the turn it conceals itself. 28.4.3 Commanders in CFs can of course roll for Initiative as usual. (This needs a bit of trust, so be sure to keep track of your actions.) A CF that suffers a Loose Cannon result is revealed, regardless of where it is on the map, but the enemy player must write the Loose Cannon order before the actual revealing takes place.

28.5 Visibility Conditions

28.5.1 When visibility changes for the better at dawn (or otherwise) the player who moves first has an obvious advantage as he will be able to react first to those units that have been revealed. Therefore we suggest that the mutual revealing should take place after the First Player's Command Phase in order to cancel out the First Player's advantage a bit. 28.5.2 At a certain range a Commander can no longer make out what is moving about in the distance. But while he would not have a chance to make out what or who is moving about out there he would be quite sure there is something there, as rumors don't stir up dust the way 3000 marching troops do. Therefore CFs moving in enemy LOS beyond 15 hexes (2700 meters or 3000 yards) are revealed only if they are decoy CFs. CFs with real troops in them are not revealed. It should then be obvious to the Enemy Player that that particular CF is indeed something real and hostile.

Sidebar

Example: In Marengo the French Player starts the game with four decoys, as he starts with four divisions on the board. When Napoleon arrives this number is increased by two, one for Monnier's Division and one for the Consular Guard cavalry.

These rules came up while discussing a Salamanca scenario for NBS. The problem with that battle is that it would most likely never have taken place had Wellington and Marmont had the same bird's-eye view of the battlefield a wargamer has. The two generals based their decisions on what could be seen and heard from were they stood, and since the battle was fought over quite broken ground they accordingly suffered a lot from what wargame jargon calls "limited intelligence". The same problem exists with Austerlitz, Gettysburg, and several other battles where crest lines and bad weather messed up visibility. And this problem is most apparent in low-level games, because in an operational/strategic game such as an Operational Combat Series scenario we work with half-week turns, ample time for intelligence to come up with fair ideas of what the enemy is up to, while in the twenty to thirty minutes of an NBS scenario, all this time might be spent staring at a pillar of dust and trying to figure out if it is Grouchy's or someone else's dust.

But we are talking about "limited intelligence" here, not "no intelligence". Most Commanders have an idea of what is going on but lack the details or misinterpret them. But a lot of attempts to simulate these problems have gone too far into the other corner, making the players effectively blind. Instead of hovering around in the sky, the players suddenly perceive the world in snapshots every twentieth minute. Perhaps that approach would make a good simulation of a WW2 submarine captain's war, but few Commanders ever rode around the battlefield with their eyes closed.

29.0 Random Events (Optional)

For those of you that think you can handle the uncertainty and frustration of odd things just happening, try these rules. At the start of each Player-Turn the player rolls one die. On a result of one a random event has occurred. Roll two dice and consult the table below. If a result is not applicable for any reason, treat it as No Event.

Standard Random Events Table

2D6	Event
2	Loose Cannon
3	Game Table
4	Order Lost
5	Game Table
6	Delay Reinforcements
7	Cavalry Recovery
8	Advance Reinforcements
9	Game Table
10	Commander Loss
11	Artillery Accident
12	Loose Cannon

29.1 Standard Random Events

Advance Reinforcements Move the next reinforcements the player awaits one turn nearer, regardless of when the reinforcement is due, i.e., if the reinforcements were to arrive the next turn, they will arrive this turn, and if they were to arrive at midnight, they will arrive at 2300. For variable reinforcements that require die-rolls to enter, roll twice. If reinforcements are due this turn, the reinforcements may force march without rolling for Straggler Losses this turn. Artillery Accident Randomly select one of the player's batteries. If Limbered, the battery has had a traffic accident. The battery is Disorganized and loses one gun point. If Unlimbered, the battery suffers an ammunition explosion. It must immediately fire Cannister against its own hex and the hex suffers Morale Change and all other effects accordingly. Cavalry Recovery For this turn only, roll for any (Blown or not) cavalry units that would otherwise qualify for Straggler Recovery as if they were infantry. Commander Loss One of the player's Commanders on the map, chosen at random, becomes a casualty. The Commander's current location does not matter. This event covers such things as friendly fire, sniping, accidents and stray cannonballs. If Napoleon, or any other victory- point-awarding Commander, suffers this result he is wounded and out of the game, but no victory points are awarded or lost. Delay Reinforcements Move the player's next reinforcements one turn further away, regardless of when the reinforcements are due, i.e., if the reinforcements were to arrive this turn, they will arrive next turn, and if they were to arrive at midnight they will arrive at 0100. Variable reinforcements requiring die-rolls to enter are not rolled for this turn. Game Table Roll on the special table for the particular game you are playing. Loose Cannon The Phasing Player must randomly select one of his commands. The selected command suffers a Loose Cannon result. It may not use Local Initiative this turn, and any orders due to arrive this turn are lost (discarded). Order Lost One randomly determined order currently in transit is for one reason or another lost and will not reach its destination. This must be "discovered" on a roll of 5 or 6 just as if the order had been Distorted.

29.2 Older Games

Game Table - Austerlitz

Die	Allied	French
1	Lingering Fog / Cold	Lingering Fog / Cold
2	Katusov Wakes Up	Cautious Murat
3	Royal Inspiration	Napoleon Checks on Joseph
4	Royal Inspiration	Napoleon Shows Off
5	Division Gets Lost	"We are all grenadiers!"
6	Wing Commander Resurgent	Telepathy?

Lingering Fog / Cold If rolled before 10:00 the fog effects of the 9:30 turn will remain during the 10:00 turn as well. If rolled after 9:30, in the December cold all rolls for Straggler Recovery will suffer a -1 modifier during the current and next complete hour. Katusov Wakes Up Katusov decides that he cannot passively watch a disaster unfolding. He is flipped to his "3" side and remains that way until either the Kaiser or the Tsar rolls a Loose Cannon result, at which time Katusov reverts to his normal, disgusted, self. (Note that the random event "Royal Inspiration" is enough to to make Katusov despair again.) Cautious Murat Having been chastised by the Emperor for his rash behavior during the previous week, Murat decides to adopt a cautious stance. He may not roll for Initiative during the rest of the game and his subordinates have their Commander ratings reduced by 1 when rolling for Initiative. If this event is rolled again, Murat reverts to his normal self. Royal Inspiration One of the Royals intervenes, roll one die to determine which one and then roll another die. On 1-3, the Regent in question must issue one Engage Order written by the French player. On 4-5 the Regent in question must issue one Engage Order written by the Allied player. On a 6 the Regent will stop either an order in transit or cause one unaccepted order to be thrown away. Choose one available order at random and remember that the Royals can only affect troops of their own nationality. Napoleon Checks on Joseph Joseph Bonaparte, the Emperor's not-so-martial brother, commanded the 4th Line Rgt in Vandamme's Division. When this event occurs, Napoleon decides to check on Joseph and must move right away to 2-1-4 and spend a complete Command Phase with it. Napoleon may not issue any orders while yelling at his brother. Napoleon Shows Off The Emperor thinks (more or less correctly) that he has things so perfectly under control that he does not need to issue any orders this turn. And so does the player. No new orders may be issued this turn. "We will wait another quarter of an hour." Division Gets Lost The confused Allied command structure made life miserable for the Divisional Commanders. When this event occurs one randomly determined division currently under Engage Orders may not move closer to the enemy (except to Reaction Charge) during this turn while the Commander tries to sort things out. "We are all grenadiers!" The French troops where confident, bordering on reckless, during the battle. When this event occurs the Allied player determines one French infantry brigade that must try to enter Close Combat with an eligible target during the next Movement Phase. It reverts to normal the next turn.

Wing Commander Resurgent Katusov and the Allied wing Commanders try to take control of things. Roll one die: on 1-3 Katusov can give Buxhöwden an order as if the latter was a normal Corps Commander for all the left wing; on 4-5 Katusov can give Bagration an order for the right wing and one of the numbered Columns of the left wing which is attached to Bagration's command; on a 6 Katusov can give Kollowrath an order for the 1-C and 2-C together. All these arrangements are for the purpose of one order and one order only. Telepathy? During the battle Napoleon displayed an uncanny insight into the Allies intentions. When this event occurs the French player may ask the Allied player to reveal the orders of one of his formations. Game Table - Marengo

Die	Austrian	French
1	Divisional Stoppage	Kellerman Rides Again
2	Another Wing!	Lapoype shows up
3-4	Ott Hesitates	Bad Ideas!
5	Bring the Cavalry!	Advance Reinforcements
6	Melas Retires	Delay Reinforcements

Divisional Stoppage The Austrian Divisions operated in a somewhat random fashion at Marengo. When this event occurs, one randomly determined Austrian division with an implemented order stops in its tracks, just as if it failed an Attack Stoppage check. Count Ott's wing as "a Division" for these purposes. Kellerman Rides Again Kellerman, who had his moment in history at Marengo, inspires his men to new heights. His brigade may erase one box of Permanent Casualties. Another Wing Melas figures that another Wing Commander may be a bright idea. He may immediately order Zach or O'Reilly to function as temporary Wing Commander (as per the optional rules) for the purpose of one order and one order only. Lapoype shows up Lapoype (La-Division) moves to the sound of the guns and shows up at 11:00 or later as per the optional rules (giving 1 VP to the Austrians if he actually arrives). He enters at area B with the order to move to Army HQ. Ott Hesitates Ott is unsure of Melas' intentions. He may not roll for Initiative or try to accept a new order this or the following turn. If currently under orders, neither Ott nor any Commander under his command may move this turn. Bad Ideas! If Napoleon has not entered the map yet, randomly determine which one of Lannes, Murat or Victor comes up with something a bit too clever and receives a Loose Cannon result. Bring The Cavalry! Melas figures his rear is safe and sends for the rest of Elsnitz's Division. The units will arrive at A in four turns and will move directly to join Elsnitz. (Give the French player 1 VP.) Delay Reinforcements / Advance Reinforcements As standard event. Melas Retires If the Austrians are 4 VP's ahead, the elderly Melas decides he has done enough and hands over command to Zach, who may not issue any orders this turn.

Game Table - Aspern-Essling

Die	Austrian	French
1	Hiller	Train Catches Up
2	Archducial Confidence	Consolidation
3	Personal Example	Tempers!
4	Grenadier Recovery	Check the Bridges!
5	Corps? - Column?	Panic
6	Rain	Fire

General Note: These are best used with the "Variable Interruption" variant and letting the French Player bring on Davout's corps if all other French units have entered. A French "Delay or Advance Reinforcements" Standard Event has no effect, as the arrival of reinforcements are already handled through the Bridge rules.

Hiller Though one of the better Austrian Commanders, Hiller had strong opinions about orders he didn't agree with, an attitude that led to him leaving the Army due to an "illness" on the eve of Wagram. If this result is rolled and Hiller's Corps does not have Engage Orders, his rating drops to 0; and if it have his rating drops to 1. If this result is rolled again, Hiller calls in sick and leaves the battle as if he had become a casualty. Train Catches Up If rolled when the bridge is up this result means that the French Commanders waiting to cross allowed a few wagons loaded with cartridges to sneak past them. Roll for commands suffering ammunition shortage as in 2.1 (in the online Aspern-Essling update kit) until one succeeds or all fail (owner chooses the order). If rolled when the bridge is down a Commander cautiously restricts his troops. A command randomly chosen now suffers an ammunition shortage. Archducial Confidence Now Charles feels a bit more confident!If the VPs at the moment mean a Minor Austrian Victory or better (from the Austrian perspective), the Austrian player can choose to use option 3.8.1 (with the attendant VP loss). Consolidation The French player may dissolve all infantry units but the strongest in any division of either II or IV Corps that have no enemy adjacent and "hand over" the surviving boxes of those units (losing any stray Stragglers in the process) to the strongest unit, thereby allowing it to erase Permanent Casualies. The Division is permanently Wrecked. Personal Example The Archduke repeatedly took great personal risks during the battle, leading by example in a quite spectacular way. (The Archduke himself later pointed out that an anemic little fellow such as himself never could have dashed about waving huge infantry standards, but nevermind...) When this result is rolled, Charles must immediately dash off and either personally lead a charge into Close Combat or rally a Routed unit. He may not issue any orders before he has done one of those things, something that might take several turns. Tempers! Tempers run high among the French Commanders. When this result is rolled, the otherwise rather level headed Bessieres decides he can't stand Lannes anymore. An instant duel is avoided, but from now Bessieres and his subordinates functions as "0" rated Commanders when handling any order involving attaching units to Lannes, and any CAV-unit being attached to Lannes when the event is rolled immediately returns to Bessieries. If this result is rolled again, Bessieres calms down.

Grenadier Recovery The Austrian player may dissolve the currently weakest unit of 1G-R or 2G-R and distribute the surviving boxes (losing any stray Stragglers in the process) to the other units of the two divisions, thereby allowing them to erase permanent kills. The dissolved brigade of course counts against wreckage. Check the Bridges! The engineers need some encouragement. Napoleon must immediately move to the bridge and spend the next French Command Phase there. He may not issue any orders while he is at the bridge. Corps? - Column? The Austrians were organized in corps but ordered about in columns, something that was slightly confusing to the Commanders involved. When this result is rolled, one randomly determined Austrian Divisional Commander has misunderstood things a bit and on a die roll equal or less than his Command Rating he will immediately attach his command to the nearest corps he does not belong to, automatically accepting that corps order. The division follows its new corps until either ordered to return to its original corps or the "adopted" corps suffers Attack Stoppage. Should the player roll higher than the Commander's command rating, the Commander figures he does not belong anywhere and "detaches" his division from his corps, stopping as if he had stopped while on Independent Orders. Panic If rolled during day of the 22nd this roll means that all Wrecked French Divisions must take separate Attack Stoppage Checks and the ones that fail must make an Emergency Withdrawal towards the bridge. This roll has no effect before dawn of the 22nd. Rain A rainstorm starts and will go on until the player who rolled this event rolls a five or six on one die on a future Random Events Check. During the rainstorm, the bridge is automatically down, all Movement Allowances except for the three hexes of Cavalry Charges are halved, visibility is reduced to three hexes and no Skirmisher Fire may take place. There is a –2 modifier to the Loss Tables and the Firefight table in Close Combat. A rainstorm will extinguish all fires, obviously. Fire A hex in one of the villages catches fire. Place a suitable fire-marker (TCS smoke markers will do fine) in a randomly determined Town/ Village hex that was the scene of a Close Combat in the previous turn. Units starting a turn in a fire hex must check morale, as must any unit that enters a fire hex. Units that fail the check become Disorganized. Each time the Turn Marker is moved any fire on the map will burn out on a roll of five or six on one die.

30.0 On Orders

These are not actual rules, since it's impossible to write exact rules for how to write correct orders, as a lot depends on the specific situation. Take these as general guidelines rather than strict rules. How tight do the geographic objectives of an order have to be? There are no fixed number of hexes here. It depends on the terrain, the size of the formation and the local situation. For a defense, a defending division can handle 3-4 hexes around its objective. A corps 4-5 hexes per division. If you can be pushed back 10 hexes and still follow somekind of orders, you have written your orders too liberal. You could have a defensive order to fall back while fighting a delaying action. But if you do that, you have to keep within a few hexes a given axis (usually a road). Similarly, for an attack, you have to have an axis of advance with a frontage of perhaps 3-5 hexes for a 3 brigade division (to take an example). If a fight breaks out far away from from that axis, you should push on along the axis rather than engage the diversion.

Cavalry, due to their nature, are somewhat freer in their restrictions. Still, you should at least be within the rough limits above when you start a Cavalry Charge, and try to get back within them once you've recovered from it. What kind of attacks am I allowed to do while I have orders to hold in place? All attacks except strictly local counterattacks require Engage Orders. For a quick rule of thumb on what is a local counterattack, try this: You are attacking ground your troops physically held under the current order one or a few turns ago. "More than a few turns" probably means the troops have conceded the ground and would need new orders to recapture it.

What happens if I move down a Road and run into enemies? That depends on how you wrote the order. If you made the Road movement a General Order, your units will fail their orders if they encounter enemies. "Encounter" here means they get into a fight, or a likely fight, not just seeing some enemies in the distance or an artillery unit taking potshots from more than a kilometer away. If you wrote the Road movement as an Engage Order, on the other hand, you are free to fight your way through any resistance you encounter on the way. On the other hand, you have to roll for Attack Stoppage each turn, even if the Road is free of enemies. Fair enough? Can I use conditional orders? Yes, you can use conditions like, "attack at 10:00", "attack when V Corps initiates its attack", or "attack when V Corps has gained Hümburger Hill". The danger of this is of course that those conditions might either be long overdue when the order is accepted, or the conditions might never happen. If a unit has timed orders and that time has already passed when the order is accepted, it should start executing its orders immediately. If a unit has conditional orders, and the conditions haven't occurred yet, it is considered to be defending in place while waiting for the right conditions. Can I adopt a Default Defense while in the middle of a fight, after capturing half the objective? Sure, but you can't continue to attack, only hold what you have gained so far. If you are initiating Close Combats against hexes or moving into victory hexes you didn't hold when you declared the Default Defense, you are cheating. Counterattacking hexes you held when declaring the Default Defense and subsequently lost is of course perfectly OK.

31.0 Some Brief Notes on Tactics

Yes, this is a game about commanding armies. We have told you so all the way through this book. Still it is a good idea to know how the tools of your trade work. So, here we go.

1. Combat is Dangerous

This might sound silly and obvious, but this is important. In this system combat can wreck the best of units in a game turn and few units are (Just as in real life.) good for more than two charges per day. Therefore, do not engage in combat unless there is a point in doing it. Do not attack "just because" and develop the common sense to fall back in the face of an attack unless you are defending something very valuable. If you need to "pin" someone use artillery and skirmishers or perhaps the threat of an attack. Remember that every combat avoided means a unit that can be used for something more purposeful later.

2. Combined Arms

Napoleonic tactics offers a very intricate game of rock-scissors-paper. Artillery offers ranged firepower, cavalry momentum and shock and infantry staying power and the ability to capture terrain. Add skirmishers and horse artillery to the equation and you have puzzle that you can ponder forever. Take your time to figure out strengths and weaknesses of the different arms. Note that cavalry is very fragile and that the threat of a charge is often as good as an actual charge. Skirmishers are good at making a nuisance of themselves, but will not last long in open terrain unless closely supported. Artillery can soften up an enemy before your attack or ruin his attacks, but it can never attack itself. Infantry is sluggish but is the only arm that can both capture and hold terrain by itself. Learn how these arms interact and support each other.

3. Keep the Distance

You will soon discover that once you get within 3 hexes of the other guy all hell breaks loose. Reaction Charges and Opportunity Fire will mess with everything you do and the grass will be crawling with skirmishers. Soon you will be entangled in some pointless vendetta that will easily take on a life of its own and start to burn troops you once had better plans for. Hence. Stay clear unless you mean to fight. Also: do not be afraid to break off from combat in order to rally. There is no point for a disorganized unit to stand around next to the enemy, better get them out of the way and sort them out for a new try.

4. Fire, Fire, Fire

No matter what Suvarov said about the bayonet being "a wise virgin" artillery is the real killer. A good bombardment before you attack will always help. And not just for one or two turns. Blast away for a while and wear him down. The longer you keep it up the better. Be patient.

5. Reserves

Keep reserves. Both on the attack and defense. This is crucial as when an attack breaks down into a mess of disorganized units the winner will be the first player who can send in a good order unit to restore the line. Or break it. It works both ways. Attack with everything on a wide frontage and you will be less successful than the attack on a smaller frontage but with a second wave in support. On a battlefield level always make sure that you have a "general reserve" at some convenient central spot behind your lines. It does not have to be the Imperial Guard, but rather anything in reasonably good shape that can be sent to counter an unexpected development. And remember that the moment you commit a general reserve it is time to (somehow) create a new one, something that sounds pretty logical but is very hard to do.

6. High Ground

It is always a good idea to be uphill. A certain British general made an extremely successful career out of lurking on hilltops and there is no reason not emulating him. Your gunners will get a better view of things and your can hide people from harm's way behind the crest. Furthermore anyone trying to attack you on your hill will find the going slow and best of all; as he runs out of movement points just in front of your line you can hit him with a crushing downhill charge.

7. Smash Him

Learn how to overpower the enemy. Good attacks hits at 3-1 odds, are preceded by a massive artillery bombardment and followed up with a relentless cavalry pursuit. They win battles for you. The tricky thing is that in order to create this situation at one point of a battlefield you somehow need to keep a large part of the enemy army busy doing nothing. That is hard. But you are in command.Manage that and you can truly call yourself a Commander.

30.0 On Being A General

So... What to do now? You have all these shiny counters lined up on a big map showing a place you did not know existed fifteen minutes ago. You have a vague idea that the side you are playing did not do too well in this battle. Sounds encouraging. How does one plan a battle, anyway? The purpose with this part is to help you come up with something that will work most of the time. As we all know big disasters only happen to those that have no idea at all of what is going on. Look at Austerlitz. It is even questionable if there was someone at all in command on the Allied side. A decent plan executed reasonably well will always save you from the worst humiliations and give the other guy a run for his money. Look at the Austrian General Schwartzenberg. He is probably the most underrated of all Napoleonic commanders outside of Spain. He sure was defeated a couple of times but by 1814 he had learnt the ropes well enough to hand Napoleon bloody draws, time and time again. An amateur? Try to do better than him. They won't tell you it in the military theory-books, but the key requirement for a truly crushing victory is an idiot opponent.

The Mission Start out with the Victory Conditions. Read them and read them again. For both sides. Look at the map and figure stuff out. Where are you and where is the enemy? Get the big picture, do not bother to memorize the odd victory point for that house by the river or the fact that this or that brigade will show up at 11.30 AM at Frau Böse's Tavern. Instead, find the main directions and the most important criteria. Do the same for the other guy. Find out what he would like to happen and where your interests clash. Compare notes. If both sides win by holding on to Grossgörschen you pretty much know what the game will be about. Even if you do not like to write stuff down the end result of this - how to win - is one of the two things you should always write down. In capital letters. You must "CAPTURE THE DANUBE BRIDGES" while the other guy must "HOLD THE VILLAGES AND BEAT HIM (you!) UP". Never forgetting these goals is what "maintenance of aim" is all about. As soon as you order anything during the game ask yourself if it makes sense in the big picture. "Why am I attacking the bridge?" "Because I will win the game if I capture that damned bridge, that's why." The moment you are doing things "just for the whatnot of it" you are in trouble.

Avoid Comitment During all this preparatory work, try to remember that the longer you can avoid committing your mind to this or that plan the longer you will be able to see the things clearly. What comes across as a perfect plan with the rules in one hand, a beer in the other and the map sort of slumped over the dining table might not be that perfect once the counters are out and you have a live gamer in front of you. But, since you had the game figured out from the start you have kept your perfect plan and instead of ditching it just modified it a bit more every time it ran into a new problem. It will not be recognizable, nor the least good in the end. The Terrain Now spend a few minutes looking over the terrain. Note important things such as the fact that the Elster, the Luppe and their tributaries forms a mile-wide Teutonic Everglades on both sides of Leipzig. Draw conclusions. Leipzig's flanks are secure. No matter how tempting it would be to cross the maze of rivers and attack Lindenau to surround the French, it cannot be done. Note how the western part of the Talavera battlefield is covered in shrub. You can cross the Fontanone at three places. Where do we have cavalry country? Skirmisher country? No- go country? The woods & swamps between Aspern and the Danube seals that flank off. The area between Essling and the river is open cavalry country. Then check out the road net. If it is messy map it up. What goes where and where are the chokepoints? Better people than you have been fooled by roads that was not there. You just might be able to pinpoint that junction worth dying for and if you get there first you might avoid a lot of dying among your troops. Enemy Options Make mental notes and move on to the other guy's options. You know what he needs to do to win so how will he do it? If his victory conditions read "CAPTURE THE DANUBE BRIDGES" and your army is between him and those bridges, what will he do? He will come at you and knowing the lay of the land you can safely assume that the first thing he will hit is that village called Aspern. At this point you might just want to write down important thing #2. The timeline. Mark out those crucial things that will affect your planning. When will that first inevitable clash take place? A little paperwork might reveal that he will not be able to attack your forlorn division until four in the afternoon and since night falls at five it will only have to fight for an hour. Maybe those guys aren't that forlorn. At this point you will notice that it is actually quite easy to figure an encounter-battle out. Even though there are people coming from all directions at all times there are only so many different things they will like to do. You can predict that there will most likely be a fight for Champaubert in the late morning as by then he will have two corps converging on the place. And no matter what you do you will only have Olssufiev's division there when he shows up and (as he probably has figured out as well) there is not much you can do about the whole thing besides try to withdraw in an orderly manner. Where he goes after that is also quite easy to figure out as he - like any other sane person - will try to hurt you a lot while keeping his own losses down. Hence he will leave a strong flank guard east of Champaubert and trail off west towards... Montmirail.

This way it is damned easy to predict every step of Napoleon's legendary Champagne campaign - the "Five Days of Glory" - just because every next step is so obvious that you can hear the road signs scream where you MUST go. That the plan is pretty obvious - as most good plans are - does not make its spectacular execution less impressive. In the end a simple, but well executed, plan will always defeat a brilliant idea unless it just as well executed.

Now You Got Him... NOT With this view of things figuring the enemy out is simple. Most of the time he will follow a logical path. With minor variations, but regardless of which side of the tree he'll decide to walk he will still wind up in the same spot. It gets harder predict events if there are one or more point where the enemy's decisions will set the pace of an entire battle. Will he go left or right and how long will it take before you will know? Look over both case LEFT and case RIGHT here. You must understand them both. Two things can really mess up your unveiling of the enemy plans. First is of course the hard-to-understand player, that will come up with a plan that - regardless if it works or not - is so outside of your box that it will catch you unaware. (Be aware that a guy that has no plan at all or has misunderstood the whole thing easily can come across as very clever. At lest for a while.) The other thing is when there is no obvious enemy plan to uncover. There are no "must do things" or "go left or right spots" to help you figure him out. The hardest battle to figure out is often one that starts with two neatly lined up armies (such as Austerlitz and Eylau). Especially in a place such as Eylau where the terrain is absolutely non-descript and the events and arrivals can be written on the back of a matchbox. Just think of it: how do you fight Eylau in a purposeful way as the Russians? Can you spell "HANG THE HELL IN THERE" in Cyrillic? Or as the French for that matter? The Master Plan Anyhow. By now you know the ground and at least three different versions of the enemy plans. You have a clear idea of what you need to do and the stage is set for your plan. If you have worked through the stuff above you pretty much know what you must do both where and when and your A1-plan will come together easily. The things you need to do to win and the things you need to do to make sure that the other guy cannot win. At this point you might have to chose between two major alternatives (A1 or A2) and each plan might have a couple of sub-alternatives (A1a, A1b) but that is about it. Chose one of the alternatives and make notes on when you need to decide on the sub- alternatives. Now, at dawn or after you have taken Ligny. The plan in all its glory has materialized right in front of you and all you have to do is to fill in the blanks and there you are.

"Filling in the blanks" is in real life known as "staff work" and means transferring your splendid ideas and inspired mumblings into working orders. Real generals have staffs to do this, you will have to do the writing yourself. And you will soon realize that writing really good orders is far harder than go on for five minutes about "attacking the Prazen at dawn" before dozing off.

There is just one problem. Given a decent opponent he has your A1 plan figured out, just as you has his. Your A1 will clash neatly with the enemy's A1 and the stage is set for a whole lotta predictable mayhem. Barring large doses of luck or big tactical mistakes neither one of you will win, at least not big. Because the enemy knows what you know. He will know that you will know and you will both know that the whole thing will be pretty dull. There are three basic ways around this rather predictable future. First you can try to just do whatever the enemy think you will do but faster. Second you can try to fool him into thinking you will do something other than do the thing both you and he agree will be the smartest thing to do. Or you can do something entirely original.

There is at this point all those funky catchphrases like "simplicity" and "dislocation" comes crawling out of the woodwork... Distract Him Before He Distracts You Let us start with the simplest trick in the book. Being faster. If you do what you need to do before he does what he needs to do you will gey ahead. Very good. There are generals lined up from here to Ulm that will agree. Speed is good. Slow is bad. "A city can always be retaken. But lost time, never." (Napoleon) So, plan for a fast and furious operation. Being the first at this or that important spot is good as it means that you will be defending it when the other guy shows up. Important military wisdom. Be there first, preferably with a lot of people. (Forrest, sort of.) Just make sure that you are not rushing of to an imprudent doom. Better still is to somehow mess up the other guy's schedule while you at the same time keep on doing what you are supposed to do. He will get entangled in handling something pointless while you rush (prudently) towards victory and glory. Furthermore, as this is basic stuff: not only do you want to throw spanners in the other guy's works, you want to throw the first spanner. If your plan includes "start the day by handling the enemy a gorilla- sized problem" you are on the right path. Especially if you can do this with minimum effort. Force him to fight for a some crossroads he'll need to get going at all. Or attack something not quite relevant for you but releveant enough for him to force him to react. Note that threatening to do things that will upset his plans will often upset his plans as much as actually doing them. Stupid and obvious as this stuff might seem it is crucial. All these modern military writers going on about "indirect approach" and "OODA loops" are trying to tell you that this is a game of "who will blink first" using armies. And few real generals have been half as good at that game as the pint-sized Corsican with the silly haircut.

If you want to learn from the master buy a good book on the 1796- 7 campaigns in Italy. Read it and look beyond the sound and fury. There is so much clever stuff going on that it is baffling.

Feints (In terms of these rules, if you want this part to be realy interesting convince your opponent that you MUST use the concealed forces rules. They add a fascinating uncertainty to this.) Once we are done planning how to mess up the other guy's planning comes the deception. As you have realized by now warfare is pretty logical. Both side's intentions will be obvious. Hence the next trick is how to hide your perfectly obvious activity. Or better still, make whatever you do look like you are doing something completely different - but very obvious and rational - from the enemy point of view. This is actually very, very hard to do. If you are going left it is simply not that easy to make someone believe that you are actually heading right.

Rule one with deception is that there is no point in pretending to do something that your opponent think is unlikely that you would do no matter what. It is better to pick the best plan you have and pretend to follow it. (And as you opponent will be reading this as well, better use your second best plan as a decoy. Or the first after all.) Try also to figure out when at the latest your cover will be blown and your enemy will start to react to your deception. That will give you an idea of how long you have to run riot before he catches up with you.

Also make sure that the other guy does not notice your deception AT ALL as if he does you are just inviting him to a shell-game. Fifteen concealment markers milling around behind a ridge line is just a distraction that he will have to deal with a bit of caution. A deception is a surprise that will cause him to scream in disbelief before scrambling to re-write his entire planning. It is hard to pull one off, but if you manage we salute you. Something Original This is where most people start when they try to figure out their own patent military operation. By trying to invent the wheel and usually getting nowhere. But no matter what they say on History Channel there are few military plans ever that actually qualifies as "original" as in "hey, lets run all our tanks across the Ardennes". Napoleon, a first rate military genius, had very few such moments. In other words, forget about it. So if you are trying to stare down the Waterloo battlefield to find something entirely original to do about it, do not despair if you fail. A lot of frighteningly experienced military officers did look that field over 1815 without coming up with any earth-shattering insights. Actually most wars are fought without anyone coming up with anything particularly original. And few military situations are actually riddles waiting for someone to solve it like some Gordian Knot. Most of them can be handled using common sense rather than divine inspiration. Still, there might be moments where that silly (or original) idea of yours can be put to use. When the enemy does something so unexpected or foolish that all that can stop him is plan "Z for Zeppo" that you spent three seconds on before realizing that it was an incredibly stupid idea. But this time plan Zeppo will win the day. Afterwards, just remember that you did not win because of your good planning, but because the enemy handed you his head for one second and you took it. That is quite another thing. They won't tell you it in the military theory- books, but wars are not won by the sharpest generals, but the rather the least confused ones.

Did we mention that you are in command?

Good Luck

Suggested Reading Napoleon is alledgedly the second-most written about person ever (beaten only by Jesus), so there is no problem finding stuff to read about him and the age he named. Here is five good basic books that has something to tell both about the big picture, the technical detail and the people involved.

• Napoleon as a Military Commander , James Marshall-Cornwall

A Military History and Atlas of the Napoleonic Wars, Vincent J. Esposito and John Elting
The Diary of a Napoleonic Foot Soldier, Jacob Walter
Tactics and the Experience of Battle in the Age of Napoleon , Rory Muir
La Grande Armee, Georges Blond

Talavera Game Rules

Introduction (Talavera)

Talavera is a game of the battle fought on the 27th and 28th of July 1809 just north of Talavera in western Spain. It was fought between King Joseph Bonaparte's French army and the uneasily united Anglo-Spanish armies under Wellesley and Cuesta and marked the culmination of Wellesley's first attempt to challenge the French hold on central Spain. The battle was a fiercely fought affair and despite the fact that the Allies managed to withstand the furious French attacks and win a victory of sorts, lack of supplies and the appearance of Soult's Army in the Allied rear soon forced the British to retire back to Portugal.

1.0 General Rules

1.1 Counters

The units of the different nationalities that took part in the battle are colored as follows: Spanish : Yellow with Bright Red Icon British : Red with Dark Blue Icon Kings German Legion (KGL) : Red with Black Icon French : Light Blue with Dark Blue Icon Rheinbund Germans : (In this case Frankfort, Hesse-Darmstadt, Westphailan and Baden troops.) : Light Blue with Light Green Icon Dutch : Light Blue with Orange Icon Polish : Light Blue with Dark Blue Icon King Joseph's Spanish Guard : Light Blue with Yellow Icon

Units are named after either their brigadier or the largest regiment in it. Commanders' names are written in italics and regimental names are in normal style. "Allies" in these rules refer to the British and Spanish armies as a whole.

1.2 The Terrain

A few geographical notes might be useful here. We are 100 kilometers west of Madrid. In Spain. The Tajo (Tagus) River runs east to west through Western Spain and reaches the Atlantic at Lisbon. The Madrid Road, the only decent road on the game map, runs the same general course as the Tajo. The Alberche, which flows down from the north, reaches the Tajo about fifteen hexes south of the map and the Madrid road crosses the Alberche some ten hexes south of Casa de Salinas.

1.2a The Tajo Bridge . The massive Puente da Santa Catalina bridge spanning the Tajo is huge enough to be one elevation level high. Units may only enter and leave the bridge at the end-points and may not stack with, nor pass through, or be passed through by, other units while on it. (Commanders, Skirmishers and HQ's are excepted from this.) Furthermore, artillery may not unlimber on the bridge and Infantry must be in column in order to enter or move along it.

1.2b Olive Groves. Olive Groves function as Orchard/Vineyard for all purposes (most of them are Ilex-shrubs, anyway). This means that the map has three types of terrain with exactly the same effect, but we thought it would be nice for players to know what they are entangled in.

1.2c The Sunken Road & The Pajar de Vergara. The Sunken Road & the The Pajar de Vergara redoubt counts as Orchards for movement purposes and lets defending infantry lines, skirmishers and unlimbered artillery enjoy the "Defending in Fortified terrain: +1" modifier on check to stand rolls as long as attacks are directed across the "sunken" or "pointed" edges. Moving along the sunken road counts as moving along an ordinary road. (The Pajar de Vergara was an uncompleted redoubt on a slight knoll and the excavated earth had simply been thrown forward to create a bank 3 or 4 feet high.)

1.2d Minor Buildings, "Points of Interest". Only the building hexes inside or adjacent to the Talavera City Wall and the Casa de Salinas and Nuesta Senora del Prado hexes are solid enough to be treated as Town/Village. No other buildings have any effect on the game.

1.2e The City Wall . Talavera's 15th century walls were in bad shape. But they were still useful for defense, especially since breaching them is beyond the perspective of this game. Units can only cross the wall through gate hex sides, treating the gate as if it was a bridge for close combat purposes. Fire or close combats can not be directed through wall hexsides.

1.3 Infantry Training

No Spanish or British infantry unit may use Combat Column. All French units can, regardless of actual nationality.

2.0 Spanish Special Rules

These rules treat the Spanish Army of Extremadura as a part of the British army, but note that this is just an arrangement necessary for the Command Rules to work. Captain-General Don Gregorio García de la Cuesta was not subordinated to anyone and was at odds with Wellesley on just about everything.

2.1 General

For command purposes the Army of Extremadura is treated as one huge corps. It will suffer a Corps Emergency Retreat if the Extremaduran Army HQ is overrun. Spanish artillery may move freely within range of either Army HQ or Divisional Commanders. Furthermore Cuesta accepts engage-type orders with a -4 modifier instead of the normal -2.

No British unit may be attached to the Army of Extremadura. Spanish Divisions may only be given Independent Orders by initiative or the "borrowing-process" outlined in Rule 2.4. The only exception to this is that Wellesley may give two Cavalry Brigades Independent Orders while ignoring the borrowing procedure.

Should Cuesta become a casualty, Alburquerque takes over command, followed by Henestrosa. Cuesta's successor inherits all of Cuesta's limitations and habits save for the wagon.

2.2 Spanish Troops

2.2a Spanish Cavalry. Spanish cavalry units must always pass a Morale Check before conducting a charge or opportunity charge against an enemy cavalry unit. If it fails the test the cavalry just stays in place. It may try to charge other units later in the turn. 2.2b Spanish Unease. The Spanish Army kept a weary eye on their British colleagues. Should at any time three British divisions be wrecked all Spanish units add an extra morale reduction to each morale reduction suffered during combat, so that an M-1 becomes M-2, M+2 becomes M+1 etc. A combat result without a morale change is unchanged (for example, if the combat result was 1(2) it does NOT become 1(2)M-1 ).

2.3 "La tartana de Cuesta"

General Cuesta was 69 years old and so ill that he could only ride if servants held him in the saddle. During the Talavera campaign he traveled in a black wagon pulled by nine mules and a month after the battle he suffered a stroke that forced his retirement. Hence Cuesta moves as a limbered foot artillery unit with 7 movement points instead of a Leader's normal 14. For obvious reasons Cuesta may not lead cavalry charges.

2.4 Borrowing Divisions

Wellesley may issue orders to Spanish Divisional Commanders, but such an order must be accepted both by the Divisional Commander in question as well as Cuesta before anything is done about it. Calculate all order handling, including arrival time, as if the order were sent to the Divisional Commander only, but when checking for acceptance make a separate roll for Cuesta on the Acceptance Table as if the order were sent to him as well. Note that Cuesta's -4 shift on engage orders apply here as well.

For each Division Wellesley borrows after the first, Cuesta also suffers a further -1 on the Acceptance Table and should he throw away an order, the Divisional Commander's order is canceled as well and Wellesley may not try to issue orders to that particular division again. One Spanish Artillery unit may be borrowed along with each division.

Example: Wellesley wants the 4th Spanish Division to move to Valdefuentes and therefore issues a General AW order to Manglano for the cost of six command points. This is the first Spanish Division Wellesley issues orders to. Two turns later the order reaches Manglano and at the same time Cuesta hears about it. Both Manglano and Cuesta now rolls for acceptance, Manglano on the "3" column (Manglano+AW+General+Wellesley) and

Cuesta on the "4" column (Cuesta+AW+ General+Wellesley). Manglano roll 23, a D6 result and Cuesta 63, an A result. This means that Cuesta has agreed to release the Division but that it still might take some time for Manglano to get going.

Once a Spanish Division accepts a order from Wellesley and is released by Cuesta it can accept new orders from Wellesley without Cuesta interfering. Wellesley can also order a Division to return to Cuesta and if the Division returns to Cuesta in un- wrecked condition, the -1 on the Acceptance Table for that Division being borrowed does no longer apply.

Wellesley may apply to Cuesta in person by issuing the order while stacked with Cuesta. Cuesta then handles his part of the order as an IPO order but does not roll for acceptance until the Order has reached the Divisional Commander as well.

2.5 Enough! (Campaign Scenarios Only)

At the start of any Allied 28th July turn when the Allied player has three or more Spanish Divisions and not more than one British Division wrecked he may proclaim that Cuesta has decided that he has had enough (Of Wellesley, The French and The World In General.). By doing so the Extremaduran Army automatically accepts an order to leave the battlefield and must exit the map either at 1.09 or 3.01 (not both) as quickly as possible. If this order is carried out successfully, that is, all Spanish units has left the map (by any kind of movement or by being destroyed) the French player will receive no Victory Points for wrecking Spanish Divisions. The Allied player will on the other hand receive one Victory Point for each Spanish Division that manages to leave the board, with all its components, in an unwrecked state, as well as one point for each two Spanish gun points that manages to leave the board.

Note that Spanish units cannot recover stragglers once they have left the board, nor do so on the board once the retreat order has been accepted.

Divisions borrowed by Wellesley when Cuesta accepts this order may elect to ignore the retreat order and instead keep on functioning as a Division directly subordinated to Wellesley. Division that stays with Wellesley is handled normally when it comes to victory-point calculations.

3.0 British Special Rules

3.1 General

All British Divisions operate on Independent Orders only. Cavalry Brigades may be given Independent Orders, but no other unit may be detached. British artillery may move freely within range of either Army HQ or Divisional Commanders.

Should Wellesley become a casualty, the British commitment to the Iberian peninsula is for all purposes doomed, but in a shorter perspective Sherbrooke takes over command, followed by Hill. Wellesley's replacement(s) can not use rule 3.4.

3.2 The KGL

The Pseudo-German units of the Kings German Legion are for all purposes considered "British".

3.3 Light Infantry

All A morale British skirmishers are considered to be armed with Rifles. These Skirmishers may move up to three hexes away from the nearest friendly unit.

3.4 Wellesley's Command Style

Wellesley commanded in a very "hands- on" manner and habitually bypassed the chain of command to move troops around by himself. Hence Wellesley may move a brigade by moving with it, provided that he started the Movement phase stacked with the brigade. During these movements units may ignore all order, command-radius and stoppage issues. While moving brigades, Wellesley himself only pays Leader MP's for the movement between hexes, not for such things as formation changes and once the brigade's MP's are exhausted he may move on.

Once abandoned by Wellesley a brigade may only move to enter close combat or to hobble back into its proper division's range. Should the brigade moved by Wellseley be stacked with its Divisional commander the commander must either immediately move back to his other brigades or tag along with Wellesley and in effect shift the position of the entire division. Should the division be shifted in this way it loses any orders it might have had and is instead considered to have "defend in place" orders.

3.5 Off to Dinner! (Campaign Scenarios Only)

The higher British officers had an alarming tendency to "stroll off" as soon as things calmed down. Therefore, as soon as night falls on the 27th (9:00 p.m.), the whereabouts of all British divisional commanders not under accepted engage orders become questionable and stays so until the 5:00 a.m. turn. If the French should start a new attack on any part of the Allied army during the night roll one die for each British divisional commander not under accepted engage orders. The roll takes place at the start of a French Close Combat Phase in which combat takes place. On a roll of one the commander is removed from play and reappears again with any unit of his division on the next French game turn. On a roll of two, three or four the commander is moved to hex 11.07 and must move to join any unit of his division (in order to become "bolted to the ground") in the Allied player's turn. On a roll of five or six the commander is present with his division. Note that carrying out movement orders and rolling for delay reduction might be done without canceling out this rule. The only thing that does so is if combat in general "carries over" from the dusk turns into the night (a few bickering skirmishers are not enough). In this case this rule is ignored.

Note that there are several ways to abuse and deliberately defuse this rule and if players feel they are likely to do so they should ignore it altogether.

4.0 French Special Rules

4.1 General

The I and IV Corps can operate any of their divisions on Independent Orders but may never cross-attach divisions between them. The Beamont-1 brigade may operate either on Independent Orders or be attached to any of I Corps' Divisions. Cav-IV brigades may operate either on Independent Orders or be attached to any of I Corps' Divisions Dessolles' division and the two dragoon divisions must operate on Independent Orders issued via Jourdan (or initiative) and the Royal Guard is controlled by 4.4 below. The DR artillery unit must stay within range of either one of the two Dragoon Divisions and the Army artillery units may move freely within range of any Commander in the army.

Should Joseph become a casualty, Jourdan takes over command, followed by Victor, both functioning as perfectly normal Army commanders. Should Jourdan be killed while Joseph is still alive he is not replaced and 4.2b ceases to be in effect. Otherwise all personal restrictions in 4.2 die with its owner.

4.2 The French Command

The French army's command structure was a mess. The bright, but utterly unmilitary as well as un-charismatic King Joseph I ("The Usurper," to the Spanish.) was in charge, aided by his sulking, but highly capable, advisor Jourdan. These two were both far from the battle when it started and they where constantly harassed by the inspired and temperamental Victor who had his own ideas of how things should be done, as well as a way of initiating actions and then demanding support for them. The following rules reflect this situation.

4.2a Joseph may never leave the Army HQ and may only issue In-Person Orders. Dubious as his status might have been he is in command and if he is not on board in any scenario the French player is left to get orders by initiative. Also see 4.3 & 4.4.

4.2b Jourdan may roam the board freely but may not lead attacks of any kind or use initiative. Jourdan can be used to transmit orders from Joseph to commanders that Joseph (by being limited to IPV orders at HQ) can not reach. This is done by Jourdan first accepting the order himself, then moving to the commander in question and then "re-issuing" the order for a new round of acceptance. When Jourdan re-issues an order he uses his own command rating, not Joseph's. Jourdan may only transmit one order at a time. 4.2c When acting on initiative, Victor checks for corps stoppage as if he was a "0" rated commander. This does not apply to Independent Orders Victor has issued to his subordinates by using initiative.

4.3 Joseph's Remote Control (Campaign Scenarios Only)

Starting at 8:00 p.m on the 27th and until he enters the map Joseph may attempt to control his army from off-map. He may issue one order per turn to any formation already on the map. Compute the arrival times for these orders by adding the time needed to move from hex 62.05 to the recipient to a number of turns equal to the roll of one die. Example: It takes two turns for an order to move from 62.05 to Ruffin's Division at the 33.17crossroads. Adding a die roll of "4" will mean that it will take a total of six turns for the orders to reach Ruffin.

4.4 The Royal Guard

Joseph is the Royal Guard Division's Divisional Commander. This means that since these units must remain within range of Joseph they are also tied to the Army HQ and need no separate orders to tag along with it.

4.5 Sebastiani

Since Lefebvre had been sent to Germany in February Sebastiani commanded the IV Corps as well as his own division while waiting for Ney to show up and take command. The units of the 1-4 Div may therefore treat either Sebastiani or the Corps HQ (when Sebastiani needs to leave for Army HQ) as their divisional commander, but all units must trace to the same counter on any given turn.

4.6 The Royal Road (Campaign Scenarios Only)

From 8:00 pm on the 27th the French player must keep all units of one un-wrecked division on or adjacent to the road to Madrid between 15.05 and 25.01 to guard the French rear against Spanish forays. Initially the 2nd Dragoon Reserve division fulfills this requirement upon entry but may be replaced by another division. Should the division guarding the road be attacked in any way the French player is released from the requirements of this rule for the rest of the game.

5.0 Variants

5.1 The Classics

Some people feel that a simulation of Talavera would not be complete without rules handling two famous freak incidents of the battle. For those, here are rules for Ansons's spectacular charge into a ditch and the widespread Spanish panic on the evening of the 27th. None of them carries any Victory Point penalties.

5.1a Ditch!! At any one time a charging British cavalry unit enters a new hex the French (or Spanish - if such a person is around) player may call out "Ditch!" The cavalry unit is disorganized, takes hits equal to the roll of one die and the charge ends. It is proper for the target unit to still form square and look surprised while the chargers take a dive.

5.1b Treason !! At any one time before 11 pm on the 27th the French player may call out "Treason!" provided there are currently no French units within six hexes of any Spanish one. Designate one Spanish D or E morale infantry unit that for reasons unknown has to check morale and if it fails it suffers a M-2 result and has to retreat 2 hexes. After the (very likely) retreat has been carried out all units that are or have been adjacent to the retreating unit during any part of its retreat must take a morale check and risk the same result. The players are now free to spend as much time as needed to explain why this happened.

5.2 Craufurd Arrives

Despite marching 65 kilometers in 26 hours Robert Craufurd and his soon to be legendary Light Brigade arrived at Talavera a day too late for the battle. This variant suggests that Craufurd's men did march even faster than they did.

Beginning at 10:00am on the 28th the British player rolls two dice at the start of his command phase. On a roll of 12 Craufurd and the optional 2Lh arrive at hex 01.09. They are under orders to move to Army HQ and await further orders. This variant does not cost any Victory Points.

5.3 French Command Variants

Historically the arguing French Commanders did cancel each other out in a fashion. These variants assume one of them gains the upper hand and replaces all parts of rule 4.1 above. None of these variants cost any Victory Points.

5.3a If Joseph tries harder to enforce his will. Jourdan will be removed from play in disgust. All other likewise disgusted French officers have their ratings reduced by one when rolling for initiative and stoppage. Joseph may still not leave the Army HQ but may send Aide-delivered orders The restraints on Victor's initiatives 4.2c remains in effect.

5.3b If Joseph persuades Jourdan to handle things, Jourdan will function as a perfectly normal Army Commander while Joseph will function as just a Royal Guard Divisional Commander, still bound to the Army HQ. Meanwhile the sulking Victor's Command Rating is reduced to 2.

5.3c With Victor allowed to lead the proceedings Jourdan is once again removed and Joseph functions as per 4.2a. Victor then takes over Jourdan's role as messenger in 4.1b, keeps on commanding his own corps and may use initiative to issue IPV orders to any French division. (Schizophrenic, yes, a lot, but Victor on a roll would probably have tried it.)

5.4 Cuesta and Myth

Most explanations of why the Anglo- Spanish operation on the Tajo failed centers on Cuesta's behaviour. That is, a lot of non-Spanish explanations do. Meanwhile a lot of Spanish material has gone a long way to excuse Cuesta and blame the whole thing on Wellesley. These two variants are for those who want to examine the Cuesta Myth in detail. Both of these variants gives the Allied player three Victory Points.

5.4a Cuesta, Misunderstood . Cuesta was a fair commander who has been unjustly blamed for everything that went wrong in the Talavera Campaign. He can not be blamed for Wellesley being an arrogant, uncooperative control-freak.

Ignore rule 2.3 and raise Cuesta's Command Rating to 3. No British Commanders .may roll for initiative and Wellesley may not send orders directly to Cuesta. The ignored Cuesta may only get orders by using initiative and may use that to issue Independent Orders to his divisions.

5.4b Cuesta, Moron . Cuesta was the worst excuse for a General history has seen and his erratic and deceitful ways was the cause of all Allied problems during the campaign. All normal rules apply and the Spanish army, Cuesta included, may never roll for initiative. Furthermore, roll two dice each British Command Phase and check the following table.

2-9 Absolutely nothing happens. Cuesta is oblivious to the world.

10 One randomly determined Spanish Division throws away its current order.

11 One randomly determined Spanish division has accepted Independent Orders to withdraw into Talavera. If a Division gets this result a second time it is ordered to cross the Tajo bridge and leave the map to the south.

12 One randomly determined Spanish division has accepted Independent Orders to attack the nearest French formation.

5.5 Wilson For Real

The epitome of "pluck," Lt-Col Robert Wilson, and his Lusitanian Legion were, together with some Spanish units, operating northeast of Talavera. In real life Wilson was one roadless mountain range away and was therefore ignored (or not even noticed) by the French, but this variant assumes that he did manage to cause some commotion along the Madrid Road. The French player is deprived of Dessolles' Division and gains 1 Victory Point. (Spanish supremacists may rename this variant "Venegas For Real." In that case Venegas is making good progress south of Madrid and Dessolles is assumed to have been sent back to help out.)

5.6 The Zaya's Mystery

Most sources have the Duke del Parque at the battle, but some claim he was not fit to lead the 1st Division. Yet other sources has him at Ciudad Rodrigo (or Trujillo) raising a new army. Most of the former sources agree that a Maj-Gen P. G. Zayas filled in for the Duke. To fully explore the implications of this players can use either "del Parque" or "P. G. Zayas" (on the other side of the counter) to command the division.

Another theory is that command of the 1st passed over to Brigadier J. P. Zayas, who's Van was (in theory) subordinated to del Parque / Maj-Gen P. G. Zayas. If this variant is chosen Brigadier Zayas is assumed to command both 1st Division

and The Van as a four-brigade Division. The new division is wrecked when two of its brigades are wrecked. This variant does not cost any Victory Points.

5.7 Ney in command of IV Corps

About two months before the battle, Marshal Ney had been ordered to leave his command in Galicia and instead take command over IV Corps. Ney somehow avoided complying with this order and spent the summer quarreling with Soult instead. This variant assumes that he for good or bad did follow orders. Rule 4.5 is revoked reducing Sebastiani to commanding his own division and Ney appears whenever IV Corps HQ is called for. Ney functions as a normal Corps Commander except that if he rolls a "1" when rolling for delay reduction he will immediately throw away his order. There is no Victory Point cost for this variant.

6.0 Random Events

Use these together with the random events rules found in the Series Rules.

Die	Allied	French
1	Panic!	Joseph Ponders
2	Craufurd Arrives	Wilson? Venegas?
3	British Blunders	Delay Reinforcement
4	Panic	Victor Goes Crazy
5	Cuesta Rides Again	Joseph Ponders
6	Heat	Heat

Panic - Something, be it a stray goat or a French Division, spooks the Spanish troops. Create a rout as outlined in 5.1b disregarding if there is any French troops nearby or not. This event may only be rolled once and if it is called for on the 28th instead randomly determine a wrecked Spanish Division (if there is one) and roll one dice. If the roll is higher than the divisional commander's command rating the division must immediately carry out an emergency retreat.

Joseph Ponders - Joseph is either busy arguing with Victor or trying to make sense of the situation and may not issue any orders. This event will occur both if Joseph is on board or working 'via Remote' and will last until the French Player manages to roll a five or six at the start of a French Command Phase.

Craufurd Arrives - Breaking every speed marching record there is, Craufurd's brigade arrives on the field at 01.19 provided this event was rolled on the 28th.

Wilson? Venegas? - News of Wilson or Venegas activities forces Joseph to detach units to guard his line of communications. The first time this result is rolled Joseph must order Desolles' Division to leave the map at 26.00 (should Dessoles not yet have entered he never does) and the second time it is rolled one of the cavalry divisions must be sent as well. A third roll has no result.

Delay Reinforcements - If the French player should have rolled for arrivals this turn, a this result means he may not roll at all and that this turn does not count for accumulating turns.

Heat - The Talavera Campaign was fought in oppressive heat. When this result is rolled during the day the sun takes its toll on things. One complete turn elapses without anything happening. Just move the turn-marker one step ahead.

British Blunders - One of the lower ranking British General Officers messes up. Roll one die. On a roll of 1-2 one of the (randomly determined) British cavalry brigades must if possible charge the nearest Frenchman or else suffer a loose cannon result. On a roll of 3-4 either Campbell or Mackenzie (roll die) suffers a loose cannon result. On a roll of 5-6 randomly determine one British brigade adjacent to a French unit. That brigade must immediately attack a French unit in close combat.

Victor Goes Crazy - If both Victor and Joseph are on board Victor will have a fit of sorts and throw away all orders involving his corps, regardless of order status. He will then move as fast as possible to Army HQ to discuss things further with the King of Spain.

Cuesta Rides Again – Cuesta briefly turns into an Iberian God of War. Roll one die. This is the number of Independent Orders Cuesta may immediately issue to his divisions, ignoring normal order costs and Cuesta's -4 on engage orders. After this fit of activity Cuesta will withdraw for a nap and will not do a thing for until the Allied player manages to roll a 6 on one die during the Command Phase.

7.0 Scenarios

7.1 General

All normal set up rules apply. Also note that:

Units may deploy skirmishers unless explicitly forbidden to do so in the scenario rules.
Losses suffered prior to a scenario are displayed as follows: Division or unit:

Casualties (Stragglers)

Such as: Kemmis-4: 3 (9) <1>.

Losses suffered by a Division are distributed as the owning player sees fit.

Roman numerals are used when referring to Spanish Divisions and Arabic ones when referring to British Divisions.

7.2 Campaign Starts

All the minor scenarios, except for the last one, might be used as starting points for a campaign-scenario. Simply add the information from the Campaign—part of the scenario and keep on playing until the 9:00 p.m., July 28 turn. The winner is then determined by the victory conditions in 6.3. In all these scenarios the French forces not yet on the map arrive as per the French reinforcement table.

7.3 Campaign Game Victory Conditions

To determine the winner the Victory Points (VP's) earned by each side are compared at the end of the game. VP's are earned for the following reasons.

7.3a Terrain .

Casa de Salinas (50.04): 2VP
The Crossroads (36.14): 1VP
Talavera (all hexes inside of the wall): 3VP
Cerro de Cascajal (27.25): 2VP
Cerro de Medellín (all three of 18.25, 19.25 & 20.25): 5VP
Casa de Valdefuentes (19.28): 1VP
Pajar de Vergara (20.15): 3VP
The "T-Junction" (8.20): 1VP
The Oropesa Road (1.09): 2VP

Automatic Victory If, at the start of any turn on the 28th, a player controls ALL Victory Point Hexes he wins an Automatic Victory. 7.3b Wrecked Formations . Both sides receive victory points for wrecking enemy formations.

The Allied player receives 1 VP for each wrecked French Division and another VP per Division that is wrecked by hard casualties (as opposed to Stragglers) alone.

The French player receives 2 VP for each British division (including the cavalry division) wrecked by hard casualties alone and 1 VP for each Spanish Division wrecked by hard casualties alone.

If rule 2.6, "Cuesta Quits," is invoked the above changes slightly.

7.3c Victory . Deduct the lower total from the higher.

If the difference is 6 or less, the game is a draw.

If the difference is between 7 and 11 points, the higher scoring player has won a tactical victory.

If the difference is 12 points or more, the higher scoring player has won a strategic victory.

The historical result was 10 or 11 points in the Allies favor.

1. Casa de Salinas - Short Scenario

3.00 p.m. July 27,1809

On the afternoon of the 27th Cuesta's army had streamed over the Alberche and Wellesley had started to withdraw his divisions to Talavera. As the British fell back from the Alberche, the troops of Mackenzie's Division around Casa de Salinas believed themselves to be protected by the river and were relaxing and waiting for new orders. Unknown to them Victor had found a ford a bit to the north, and under the cover of smoke from some burning buildings hit the flank of the relaxing British troops. The result was a chaotic running fight, but thanks to dumb luck more than anything else, Mackenzie's men got away. General Information: First Turn: 3.00 p.m., July 27 Last Turn: 6.00 p.m., July 27 Game Length: 7 turns Play Area: All hexes east of hex row 31.xx. First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: 53.07: 16 Lt-2-I

Pre-Game losses: None

Reinforcements: 3.00 p.m. 62.04: 2-1 less 16 Lt-2-1 and 2-I (2Lf) 3.30 p.m. 62.04: Beamont-I , I (2Lh), 2-I (2Lf) 4:30 p.m. 62.04: Rest of I Corps

Orders: 16 Lt-2-I has an (normally forbidden) Independent Order to attack Casa de Salinas. 2-I w. Beamont-I and I (2Lh) attached: Has an Independent Order to capture and then defend Casa de Salinas. I Corps: Has orders to attack and capture Casa de Salinas and then attack up to the Vargas Road.

Special Rules: The French may not deploy skirmishers at start. The "up to the Vargas Road" part of I Corps orders are created by Victor's own initiative and therefore rule 4.1c is in effect if he wants to proceed west of Casa de Salinas. The French player may only issue orders by using initiative.

Allied Information

Set-up : w/i 2 of 33.17: 1 Div less Langewerth -1, Army HQ, 2x KGL (2Lf) 45.05: Anson -Cav, Payne 50.04: Wellesley 51.04: Mackenzie -3, facing Southeast or Southwest 51.05: Donkin -3, facing Southeast

Reinforcements : 3.30 p.m. With the 3 Div unit nearest (player's choice if tied) to 50.04: Mackenzie

Orders: 1 Div: Has a D5 delay on an order to move west and off the play area at 32.19.

3 Div: Has no orders.

Army HQ. Has no orders.

Cav (with only Anson -Cav): Has orders to protect the British retreat along the Talavera-Casa de Salinas road.

Pre-Game Losses: None

Special Rules:

Some British units start the scenario out of command. Out of command units may not move except with Wellesley's aid.
Detached French brigade and divisions will automatically rejoin their parent units when within range.
Mackenzie appears at the start of the Allied Command phase but may roll for initiative or be given orders the same turn.
No British skirmishers may be deployed at start.

Victory Conditions: French Victory : French player manages to wreck three British brigades without any French brigade being wrecked.

British Victory : British player is able to move all his brigades off the playing area and none of them are wrecked. Anything else is a draw.

1b. Casa de Salinas - Campaign Start

3.00 p.m. July 27, 1809

This additional information is needed to play the entire two-day battle scenario, starting with the first clash between Mackenzie and Lapisse's divisions.

General Information: First Turn: 3.00 p.m., July 27 Last Turn: 9:00 p.m., July 28 Game Length: 53 turns Map Used: All First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: As per scenario 1.

Pre-Game losses: None Reinforcements: As per scenario 1 plus the Table of Arrivals.

Orders: As per scenario 1 and the Table of Arrivals.

Special Rules: As per scenario 1 and the Game Rules.

Allied Information

Set-up : w/i 2 of 10.12: II Cav (All) 12.11: Cuesta, Extremadura HQ w/i 1 of 13.20: Fane-Cav , Cotton-Cav w/i 1 of 14.14: V (All), Extrmdr (2Hf) w/i 1 of 15.02: I Cav (Less Rey-I Cav) w/i 1 of 15.06: I (All), Extrmdr (3Lf) w/i 1 of 15.08: Van (All), Extrmdr (2Lf) w/i 1 of 16.10: II (All) w/i 2 of 17.12: III (All) 19.12: Rey-IC w/i 2 of 19.17: 4 Div (All), British (2Lf) w/i 2 of 19.15: IV (All), Extrmdr (3Lf) w/i 1 of 23.21: 2 Div (All) 29.21: Langewerth -1, 2x British (2Lf) w/i 2 of 33.17: 1 Div less Langewerth -1, Army HQ, 2x KGL (2Lf) 45.05: Anson -Cav, Payne 50.04: Wellesley 51.04: Mackenzie -3, facing south 51.05: Donkin -3, facing southeast

Reinforcements : As per scenario 1.

Orders: 1 Div: Has a D5 delay on an order to move west and defend the south slope of Cerro de Medellin (w/i 3 of 20.22).

2 Div: Has orders to move west and defend the summit of Cerro de Medellin (w/i 2 of 19.26).

4 Div has orders to defend the terrain north of the redoubt (w/i 2 of 19.17).

Cav (except Fane-Cav and Cotton-Cav ): Has orders to protect the British retreat along the Talavera-Casa de Salinas road.

Rey-I Cav: Has an Independent Order to protect III and IV Divisions.

No other formations has any orders.

Pre-Game Losses: Each Spanish Infantry Division: 0 (2) <0> Special Rules: As per scenario 1 and the Game Rules.

Victory Conditions: As per 6.3

2. Ruffin's Attack - Short Scenario

9:00 p.m. July 27, 1809

Victor had been driving his troops hard. After fording the Alberche they had fallen on Wellesley's lounging troops around Casa de Salinas and given Donkin and Mackenzie a sharp check. As night fell, Victor, thinking he had Wellesley shaken and retreating, decided to launch a night attack to capture the important Cerro de Medellin. Ruffin commanded some very good troops, but the long day, rough terrain, and difficulty of co-ordinating a night attack, proved to be to much for them. After overrunning the first British line (troops that seem to have thought they were in a second line) the attack broke down and the French were chased down from the hill.

General Information: First Turn: 9:00 p.m, July 27 Last Turn: 1:00 a.m, July 28 Game Length: 5 turns Map Used: Only hexrows north of xx.18 inclusive are in play. No unit may move south of this area. First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: 24.25: 24 Ln-1-I 24.24: 9 Lt-1-1, 1-I (2Lf), Ruffin 24.23: 96 Ln-1-I 24.20, 24.21, 24.22: 2-I (All) 27.25: Beamont-I , I (2Lh) w/i 1 27.24: 3-I (All) 27.24: Victor, I Corps HQ I (2Lh) and I (3Hf) may stack with any unit of I Corps.

Reinforcements: None

Orders: 1-I: Has an Independent Order to attack and then hold the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 19.25 & 20.25).

The rest of I Corps has no orders.

Pre-Game Losses: 2-I: 1 (2) <1>

Special Rules: On the 9:00 p.m turn each of Ruffin's brigades must roll 1 die. On a roll of 4-6 the movement allowance for that unit and its skirmishers is halved for that turn only.

Note that while 1-I's o ders are from Victor's own initiative rule 4.1c is not in effect as 1-I are on an independent order.
The French player may only issue orders by using initiative and may not roll at all for it on the 9:00 p.m. turn.

Allied Information:

Set-up: 17.26: Tilson -2, ex-18.25 18.23: Donkin -3 20.24: Löwe -1, ex-20.25 20.22: Langewerth -1, KGL (2Lf) 21.21: Cameron -1, ex-21.20, British (2Lf) 17.23: Stewart -2 13.20: Fane-Cav 13.21: Anson -Cav 16.23 KGL (2Lf) limbered 19.21 British (2Lf) 18.25 Army HQ 20.18: Campbell -1, ex-20.19

Reinforcements: 9:00pm 15.20 Hill. (Enters with only half (7) of his movement points available.) 11:00pm 17.20 Wellesley, Kemmis -4

Orders: Both 1 and 2 have orders to defend their current positions.

Pre-Game Losses: 3 Division: 1 (2) <1>

Special Rules:

No British skirmishers may set-up at start.
No British infantry unit may move, fire or release skirmishers until a French unit has fired. (Rolling on the Odds Table is considered "firing.") This limitation is lifted at the start of the 11.00 pm turn.
Note that all British units start the scenario out of command and that most of them will stay so for the whole scenario. Out of command units may not move except with Wellesley's aid.

Note that Sherbroke does not enter the scenario at all. Victory Conditions: The player who holds at least two of the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 20.25, 19.25) at the end of the scenario is the winner.

2b. Ruffin's Attack – Campaign Start

9:00 p.m. July 27, 1809

This additional information is needed to play the campaign scenario, starting with Ruffin's night attack.

General Information: First Turn: 9:00 p.m., July 27 Last Turn: 9:00 p.m., July 28 Game Length: 42 turns Map Used: All First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: As per scenario 2 plus: w/i 1 of 30.20: 1DR (All) w/i 1 of 22.02: 2DR, DR (2Lh) w/i 2 of 36.10: 1-IV (All), IV Corps HQ, Sebastiani w/i 2 of 38.08: 3-IV (All) w/i 2 of 40.05: 2-IV (All)

Reinforcements: As per the Table of Arrivals. Cav-IV has not arrived yet.

Orders: 1-I: Has an Independent Order to attack and then hold the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 19.25 & 20.25).

IV: Has orders to defend along the line between 24.12 and 24.20 facing west.

2DR: Has an Independent Order to defend on the Madrid Road.

No other French formation has any orders.

Pre-Game Losses: 2-I: 1 (2) <1>

Special Rules: On the 9:00 p.m turn each of Ruffin's brigades must roll 1 die. On a roll of 4-6 the movement allowance for that unit and its skirmishers is halved for that turn only.

Note that while 1-I's orders are from Victor's own initiative rule 4.1c is not in effect as 1-I are on independent orders.
The French player may not roll for initiative on the 9:00 p.m. turn.

Allied Information

Set-up : w/i 2 of 10.12: II Cav (All) 17.16: Cuesta, Extremadura HQ w/i 1 of 14.14: V (All), Extrmdr (2Hf) w/i 1 of 15.02: I Cav (Less Rey-IC) w/i 1 of 15.06: I (All), Extrmdr (3Lf) w/i 1 of 15.08: Van (All), Extrmdr (2Lf) w/i 1 of 16.10: II (All) w/i 2 of 17.12: III (All) 19.12: Rey-I Cav w/i 1 of 19.14: IV (All), Extrmdr (3Lf) 17.26: Tilson -2, ex-18.25 18.23: Donkin -3 20.24: Löwe -1, ex-20.25 20.22: Langewerth -1, KGL (2Lf) 21.21: Cameron -1, Sherbrooke, ex-21.20, British (2Lf) 17.23: Stewart -2, Hill 13.20: Fane-Cav 13.21: Anson -Cav 16.23 KGL (2Lf) limbered 19.21 British (2Lf) 18.25 Army HQ 20.18: Campbell -1, ex-20.19 16.21: Mackenzie -3, Mackenzie 11.07: Wellesley 15.18: Cotton-Cav , Payne 18.13: Kemmis -4 20.16: Cambpell -4, Campbell, ex-20.17 20.15: British (2Lf)

Reinforcements: None

Orders: All infantry divisions save for V and 3 have orders to defend their current positions. So has I Cav. V Division has orders to await orders. Rey -I Cav has an Independent Order to support the Allied Troops around Pajar de Vergara

Pre-Game Losses: 3 Division: 2 (2) <1> Fernando VII-IV: 0 (3) <0> Osuna-II: 0 (2) <0>

Special Rules:

No British skirmishers may Set-up at start.
No British infantry unit may move, fire or release skirmishers until a French unit has fired or entered close combat. This limitation is lifted at the start of the 11.00 pm turn.
The "Off to Dinner" rule is in effect.

Victory Conditions: As per 6.3.

3. The Dawn Attack - Short Scenario

5:00 am July 28, 1809

As the sun came up Victor, who did not feel like waiting for the rest of the French Army to arrive, decided to launch a second attack to capture Cerro de Medellin. By courier Joseph half-heartedly agreed to the plan and sent out orders for Sebastiani to support the attack. But as Victor's first division was repulsed, the rest of the attacking formations got cautious and eventually the attack ground to a halt.

General Information: First Turn: 5:00 am, July 28 Last Turn: 9:00 am, July 28 Game Length: 9 turns Map Used: Only hexrows north of xx.18 inclusive are in play. No unit may move south of this area. First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: w/i 1 of 23.27: 1-I (All) w/i 1 of 25.23: 3-I (All), I (3Hf) 25.25: Victor, I Corps HQ w/i 1 of 25.19: 1-IV (All), IV Corps HQ, Sebastiani w/i 1 of 24.21: 2-I (All), I (2Lh) w/i 1 of 30.20: 1DR (All) 27.25: Beamont-I , I (2Lh)

Reinforcements: 8:00 am 32.18: Dessolles (All), RG (All), Army (2Lh), Army (2Lf), Joseph, Jourdan, Army HQ.

Orders: 1-I: Has an Independent Order to attack and hold the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 19.25 & 20.25).

2-I and 3-I: Each has an Independent Order to attack Cerro de Medellin's south slope, north of the orchards, as soon as 1-I gains any high ground hex-of the Cerro de Medellin.

I-IV: Has a D6 an Independent Order to Attack the British among the orchards to its front the turn after 2-I and 3-I crosses the Portina brook. All Reinforcements arriving at 8:00 have orders to move to w/i 3 of I Corps' HQ.

Pre Scenario Losses:

1-I: 4 (2) <2> 2-I: 1 (1) <1>

Special Rules:

The French player may only issue orders by using initiative before Joseph enters the game. Joseph may not issue orders "by remote" in this scenario.
Note that while 1 Corp's orders are from Victor's own initiative rule 4.1c is not in effect as all divisions are on Independent Orders.
Each infantry unit of I Corps may initially only deploy its skirmishers in any hex adjacent to itself.

Allied Information:

Set-up: 13.20: Fane-Cav , Payne 13.21: Anson -Cav 18.25: Wellesley, Army HQ 20.21: Cameron -1, ex-20.20 19.21: British (2Lf) 18.21: Donkin -3 20.22: Langewerth -1, British (2Lf), Sherbroke 20.23: Löwe -1 19.24: Tilson -2, ex-19.25, Hill 19.26: Stewart -2, ex-19.27 20.25: KGL (2Lf) 20.24: KGL (2Lf)

Reinforcements: None

Orders: Both 2 and 1 have orders to defend their current positions.

Pre-Game Losses: 1 Division: 2 (2) <1> 2 Division: 1 (1) <0> 3 Division: 1 (0) <1>

Special Rules: Note that Donkin -3 starts the scenario out of command and will stay so for the whole scenario. The brigade may not move except with Wellesley's aid.

Infantry units may initially deploy their skirmishers in any hex adjacent to themselves.

Victory Conditions: The player who holds at least two of the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 20.25, 19.25) and has wrecked more enemy brigades than himself has brigades wrecked at the end of the scenario is the winner.

3b. The Dawn Attack – Campaign Start

5:00 am July 28, 1809

This additional information is needed to play the battle scenario, starting at dawn of the 28 th .

General Information: First Turn: 5:00 a.m., July 28 Last Turn: 9:00 p.m., July 28 Game Length: 33 turns Map Used: All First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: As per scenario 3 plus: w/i 2 of 23.07: 2DR, DR (2Lh) w/i 1 of 25.15: Cav-IV (All) 25.15: 2-IV (All) w/i 1 of 24.15 and not in hexrow 23.00: 3-IV (All)

Reinforcements: As per the Table of Arrivals.

Orders: As per scenario 3.

IV (Less I-IV): Has orders to defend along the line between 24.12 and 24.20 facing west.

2DR: Has an Independent Order to defend on the Madrid Road.

All Reinforcements arriving at 8:00 have orders to move to w/i 3 of I Corps HQ.

Pre Scenario Losses: As per scenario 3.

Special Rules: As per scenario 3, but Joseph may issue by remote orders.

Allied Information

Set-up : w/i 2 of 10.12: II Cav (All) 17.16: Cuesta, Extremadura HQ w/i 1 of 14.14: V (All), Extrmdr (2Hf) w/i 1 of 15.02 : I Cav (Less Rey-I Cav) w/i 1 of 15.06: I (All), Extrmdr (3Lf) w/i 1 of 15.08: Van (All), Extrmdr (2Lf) w/i 1 of 16.10: II (All) w/i 2 of 17.12: III (All) 19.12: Rey-I Cav w/i 1 of 19.14: IV (All), Extrmdr (3Lf)

13.20: Fane-Cav , Payne 13.21: Anson -Cav 18.25: Wellesley, Army HQ 20.21: Cameron -1, ex-20.20 19.21: British (2Lf) 18.21: Donkin -3 20.22: Langewerth -1, British (2Lf), Sherbroke 20.23: Löwe -1 19.24: Tilson -2, ex-19.25, Hill 19.26: Stewart -2, ex-19.27 20.25: KGL (2Lf) 20.24: KGL (2Lf) 20.18: Campbell -1, ex-20.19 16.21: Mackenzie -3, Mackenzie 15.18: Cotton-Cav , Payne 18.13: Kemmis -4 20.16: Cambpell -4, Campbell, ex-20.17 20.15: British (2Lf)

Reinforcements: None

Pre-Game Losses: 1 Division: 2 (2) <1> 2 Division: 1 (1) <0> 3 Division: 2 (0) <1> Fernando VII-IV: 0 (2) <0> Osuna-II: 0 (1) <0>

Special Rules: As per scenario 3.

Victory Conditions: As per 6.3

4. The Main Assault

2.30 p.m., July 28, 1809

As Joseph came up a long debate broke out among the French commanders and it took until mid-afternoon before they came around to launching their third and final attack on the Allied position. Victor's men were too weary to do any serious attacking, but kept Wellesley's northern flank pinned, and meanwhile Sebastiani's men hurled themselves at the Allied line. After some very brutal fighting that wrecked both Sebastiani's Corps and most of the Allied center, the French withdrew, leaving the Allies still holding their positions. Despite the pleas from Victor and others who believed that a final attack would break the enemy line, Joseph refused. The battle was over. General Information: First Turn: 2:30 p.m., July 28 Last Turn: 6:00 p.m., July 28 Game Length: 8 turns Map Used: All First Player: French

French Information:

Set-up: w/i 2 of 36.18: Dessolles (All), Army (2Lh) 35.25: Jourdan and Joseph, Army HQ, RG (All) w/i 1 of 30.20: 1DR (All), w/i 1 of 29.24: Beamont- 1, I (2Lh) 25.25: Victor, I Corps HQ w/i 1 of 26.28: Cav-IV (All) 25.22: 54 Ln-2-I 25.23: 45 Ln-2-I 25.15: 2-IV (All) 24.20: 32 Ln-1-IV, Army (2Lf) 24.19: 58 Ln-1-IV, Sebastiani w/i 1 of 25.19: IV Corps HQ 24.18: 75 Ln-1-IV, I (2Lh) w/i 1 of 24.15 and not in hexrow 23.00: 3-IV (All) w/i 1 of 23.31: 1-I (All) 23.28: 63 Ln-3-I 23.27: 27 Lt-3-I 23.24: 3-I (less 63 Ln-3-I and 27 Lt-3-I) 23.23: 16 Lt-2-I, I (3Hf), Lapisse 23.22: 8 Ln-2-I, 2-1 (2Lf) 23.17: 28 Ln-1-IV, 1-IV (2Lf) w/i 2 of 23.07: 2DR, DR (2Lh)

Pre scenarios losses: 1-I: 7 (4) <4> 2-I: 1 (1) <2>

Reinforcements: None

Orders: 2-I: Has an Independent Order to attack the British between crest of the Cerro de Medellin and the edge of the Orchards south of it

1-I with 63 Ln-3-I and 27 Lt-3-I attached: Has an Independent Order to attack the British on the north-east slope of the Cerro de Medellin, south of Casa de Valdefuentes.

1-IV: Has an Independent Order to attack the British line in the Orchards south of the Cerro de Medellin

3-IV: Has an Independent Order to attack the Allied line around Pajar de Vergara. 2DR: Has an Independent Order to defend on the Madrid Road. Special Rules:

The reinforced 1-I breaks when three of its brigades have been wrecked. The reduced 3-I breaks after both its brigades has been wrecked.
Each regiment of I and IV Corps may deploy its skirmishers in any hex-adjacent to itself.

Allied Information

Set-up: 17.16: Cuesta, Extremadura HQ w/i 2 of 12.27: II Cav (All) 13.27: Fane-Cav 14.27: Anson -Cav 15.02: Lustna -I Cav, Henestrosa 15.05: Cntbra -I, Extrmdr (3Lf) 15.06: Grndrs -I, Zayas II/del Parque 15.07: Cmpmyr -Van 15.08: Extrmdr (2Lf) 15.09: Brbsto -Van, Zayas I 15.10: Extra-II 16.31: Marina -V, ex-16.32, Bassecourt 15.31: Africa -V, ex-15.30 16.10: Osna - II, Iglesias, ex-17.11 16.18: Mackenzie -3, Mackenzie 16.22: Donkin -3 17.11: Bdjoz -III 17.25: KGL (1Lf) (detached) 17.12: Tldo -III, de Portago, ex 18.12, Extrmdr 1Lf (Detached) 19.12: Rey -I Cav 18.16: Kemmis -4 18.21: Cotton-Cav , Payne 18.26: Stewart -2 , ex-18.25 18.25: Wellesley, Army HQ 19.13: Frndo VII-IV, Extrmdr (3Lf) with one point detached 19.14: Jaen -IV, Manglano, ex-19.15 19.17: Extrmdr (2Hf) 19.24: Tilson -2, Rpl Leader (Tilson, replacing Hill), ex-19.25 20.15: British (2Lf), One Spanish Skirmisher from Van-Division. 20.16: Campbell -4, ex-20.17, Campbell 20.18: Campbell -1, KGL (2Lf) with one pt destroyed, ex-20.19 20.21: Cameron -1, ex-20.20, British (2Lf), Sherbrooke 20.22: Langewerth -1, British (2Lf) 20.23: Lowe -1 20.25: KGL (2Lf) with one pt detached

Pre-Game Losses: 1 Division: 2 (4) <2> 2 Division: 3 (1) <1> 3 Division: 2 (0) <1> Fernando VII-IV: 0 (2) <0> Osuna-II: 0 (1) <0 > Hill is wounded, Tilson (the replacement side of Hill's counter) is in command of 2nd Div. One pt of KGL Artillery is destroyed.

Reinforcements: None

Orders: All infantry divisions save for 3 have orders to defend their current positions. So has I Cav.

Fane-Cav and Anson -Cav each has an Independent Order to defend the British left around Casa de Valdefuentes.

II-Cv has an Independent Order to support V Div.

Rey -I Cav has an Independent Order to support the Allied Troops around Pajar de Vergara.

Special Rules: Each infantry unit so capable may deploy its skirmishers in any hex adjacent to itself, but note that one of the Van's skirmishers are already deployed in Pajar de Vergara. V Div and II Cav (as well as (2Hf)) are loaned to Wellesley.

Victory Conditions: Decisive Victory: Occupies at least two hexes of the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 20.25, 19.25) and has less wrecked brigades than opponent

Marginal Victory : Occupies at least two hexes of the high ground of Cerro de Medellin (18.25, 20.25, 19.25) but has more wrecked brigades than opponent

Draw: All other cases

Order of Battle

The Army of Portugal (His Britannic Majesty's forces in Portugal) Lieutenant General Sir Arthur Wellesley 1st Division Lt-Gen. John Cope Sherbrooke Brigadier General Henry Fred Campbell's Brigade 1st Battalion Coldstream Guards 1st Battalion, 3rd Foot Guards One co. 5/60th (Royal American) Foot Brig. Gen. Alan Cameron's Brigade 1/61st (South Gloucestershire) Foot 2/83rd Foot One co. 5/60th (Royal American) Foot Brig. Gen. Ernst E.K. von Langwerth's Brigade 1st Line Battalion K.G.L. 2nd Line Battalion K.G.L. Light Companies K.G.L. Brig. Gen. Sigismund von Löwe's Brigade 5th Line Battalion K.G.L. 7th Line Battalion K.G.L. 2nd Division Major-General Rowland Hill Maj. Gen. Christopher Tilson's Brigade 1/3rd (East Kent-The Buffs) Foot 2/48th (Northhamptonshire) Foot 2/66th (Berkshire) Foot One co. 5/60th (Royal American) Foot Number in parenthesis is number of battalions, if unknown or questionable, marked with "?". Brig. Gen. Richard Stewart's Brigade 29th (Worcestershire) Foot 1/48th (Northhamptonshire) Foot 1st Battalion of Detachments 3rd Division Maj. Gen. Alexander Mackenzie Maj. Gen. Alexander Mackenzie's Brigade 2/24th (2nd Warwickshire) Foot 2/31st (Huntingdonshire) Foot 1/45 (1st Nottinghamshire) Foot Colonel Rufane S. Donkin's Brigade 2/87 (Prince of Wales's Irish) Foot 1/88 (Connaught Rangers) Foot Five companies 5/60th (Royal American) Foot 4th Division Maj. Gen. Alexander Campbell Maj. Gen. Alexander Campbell's Brigade 2/7th (Royal Fusiliers) 2/53rd (Shropshire) Foot One company 5/60th (Royal American) Foot Col. James Kemmis's Brigade 1/40th (2nd Somersetshire) Foot 97th (Queen's Germans) 2nd Battalion of Detachments One company 5/60th (Royal American) Foot Cavalry Division Lt-Gen. William Payne Maj. Gen. Henry Fane's Brigade 3rd (Prince of Wales) Dragoon Guards 4th (Queen's Own) Dragoons Maj. Gen. Stapleton Cotton's Brigade 14th (Duchess of York's Own) Light Dragoons 16th (Queen's Light) Dragoons Maj. Gen. George Anson's Brigade 23rd Light Dragoons 1st Light Dragoons K.G.L. Artillery: three British and two K.G.L batteries. OPTIONAL Maj. Gen. Robert Craufurd's Light Brigade 2/43rd (Monmouthshire) Light Infantry 1/52nd (Oxford) Light Infantry 1/95th Rifles The Army of Extremadura Teniente General Don Gregorio García de la Cuesta, Captain- General of Old Castile Van Division Brigadier José Pascual de Zayas 2nd Barbastro Cazadores (1) 2nd Volunteers of Catalonia Infantry (1) Campo Mayor Cazadores (1) Valencia Alcántara y Albuquerque Cazadores (1) Volunteers of Valencia Cazadores (1) Mariscal de Campo Duke del Parque 3/Cantabria Line Infantry (1) Canarias Militia (?) Guadix Provincial Militia (1) Triadores of Cádiz Light Infantry (1) 3rd Provincial Grenadiers (1) 2nd Division MdC Vicente Iglesias 2nd Majorca Infantry (1?) Vélez-Málaga Volunteers (3) Osuna Line Infantry (2) Burgos Provincial Militia (1) Extranjeros Volunteer Infantry (1) MdC Marquis de Portago Imperial of Toledo Infantry (1) Antequera Cazadores (1) Guadix Provincial Militia (1) Badajoz Infantry (2) Badajoz Provincial Militia (1) MdC Rafael Manglano 2-3/Irlanda Line Infantry (2) Jaén Line Infantry (2) Leales de Fernando VII Militia (2) La Corona Volunteer Line Infantry (1) 3rd Sevilla Volunteer Infantry (1) 2nd Madrid Volunteer Infantry (1) MdC Luis Alejandro Bassecourt 1st Royal Marine Regiment (2) Africa Line Infantry (1) Reina Line Infantry (1) Murcia Line Infantry (2) Sigüenza Provincial Militia (1) Ten. Gen. Juan de Henestrosa Rey Line Cavalry (4) Calatrava Dragoons (remnant) Cazadores de Sevilla (2) Sagrario de Toledo Cazadores (2) Villaviciosa Dragoons (remnant) Lustiania Dragoons (3) Cazadores de Madrid (1) Voluntarios Espana Cazadores (2) Ten. Gen. Duque De Albuerquerque Royal Guard Carabineers (1) Infante Line Cavalry (2) Almansa Dragoons (4) Pavia Dragoons (1) 1st Extremadura Hussars (2) 2nd Extremadura Hussars (2) 6 heavy, 20 medium and 4 light guns. Joseph Bonaparte, King of Spain Marshal Jean-Bapitiste Jourdan, Military Advisor Marshal Claude Victor Perrin General de Division Francois-Amable Ruffin GB LaBruyere 9th Light (3) ("L'Incomparable") 24th Line (3) GB Barrois 96th Line (3) GD Pierre-Bellon Lapisse GB Solignac (?) 8th Line (3) 54th Line (3) GB LaPlannes 16th Light (3) 45th Line (3) GD Eugene Villatte GB Cassagne 27th Light (3) 63rd Line (3) GB Puthod (?) 94th Line (3) 95th Line (3) GB Beamont 2nd Hussars 5th Chasseurs Artillery- 48 guns (6x12lb, 18x 6lb foot, 12x 6lb horse) GD Horace-Francois-Bastien Sebastiani GD Horace-Francois-Bastien Sebastiani GB Rey 28th Line (3) 32nd Line (3) "Le Brave" GB Liger-Belair 58th Line (3) 75th Line (3) GD Valence 4th Polish (2) GD Jean Leval Generalmajor Heinrich Von Porbeck 2nd Nassau (2) 4th Baden (2) GB Chasse 2nd Hollanders (1) 4th Hollanders (1) GM von Schaefer 2nd Hesse-Darmstadt Gross-und Erbprinz Regt (2) Frankfort Bn (1) GD Philippe-Antoine Merlin GB Strolz 10th Chasseurs (4) 26th Chasseurs (4)

GD Merlin Polish Vistula Lancers (4) Westphalian Chevaux-Legers (4) Artillery- 30 guns. (Two Dutch (one horse and one foot) and one Baden battery. One French horse battery.) Reserve Cavalry 1st Dragoon Division GD Victor Latour-Maubourg Col. Rousseau 1st Dragoons (4) 2nd Dragoons (4) GB Oldenbourg (d'Oullembourg) 4th Dragoons (4) 9th Dragoons (4) GB Digeon 14th Dragoons (4) 26th Dragoons (4) 2nd Dragoon Division GD Edouard-Jean-Baptiste Milhaud GB Boye (Boyer de Rebeval?) 5th Dragoons (4) 12th Dragoons (4) 3rd Dutch Hussars (4) GB Maupetit (?) 16th Dragoons (4) 20th Dragoons (4) 21st Dragoons(4) 1 Horse Battery Dessolles' Division GD Jean-Joseph-Paul Dessolles GB Godinot 12th Light (3) 51st Line (3) 103rd Line (1 -incorporated in the 51st) 27th Chasseurs (2) Guardia Real GB Saligny Kings's Guard, Grenadiers (2) Kings's Guard, Tirailleurs (2) King's Guard, Cavalry (2) One foot and one horse battery

OOB & Other Notes

Anders Fager

Putting the order of battles together for this game has been a slightly surreal exercise since most of the detail you find in them is to diminutive to show up in the game. Still, knowing that we have done our best is a gratifying feeling.

The British army was the easiest part to research as there are plenty of sources around to find every imaginable detail in. The only odd units in it are the two "battalions of detachments." These consisted of stragglers and convalescents from Moore's army that had been rounded up in Oporto during the winter and despite being a sad sight they did well during the campaign. The battalions were disbanded after the retreat back to Portugal.

It is worthy to note that the British army at Talavera was not yet the juggernaut of later years. It was still inexperienced, the light infantry tactics were still to mature and its middle leadership was plagued by a fumbling recklessness that thankfully was offset by the bravery and skill of the individual infantry battalions. Playing these scenarios players will find that the British army of 1809 is quite a one-armed weapon. It has excellent, aggressive, infantry but is hopelessly outgunned and forced to rely on erratic cavalry. It will make one realize how important Wellesley's tactical brilliance was to the British army's survival and eventual victory. Finally note that the cased shots that the British had used with great effect in the battles in Portugal did not make it into this game as the army was short on ammunition. The French Army's OOB was also quite a straightforward affair to research. Its most dubious part is what brigadiers were present and not and if anyone can tell for sure if if LaBruyere had already been replaced by Conroux, feel free to enlighten us (we know that neither Perreimond , Balthazard or Charles-Louise Grandjean was there). Especially Milhaud and Leval's brigadiers are a messy lot, but just to show off we can tell you that GdB Chasse is the very same Chasse who later commanded a Dutch division at Waterloo and that GM von Schaefer is Generalmajor Georg von Schaefer de Bernstein (of Hessen), not GM Konrad von Schaefer (of Nassau). But the later might have been in command of von Porbeck's brigade due to being von Porbeck's senior - that is if he was around and von Porbeck was a colonel as some sources claim. Furthermore it might be worth noting that Leval's multi-national division is considered "French" thanks to Leval's hard work and that Joseph's Spanish Guard mostly consisted of French, Germans and Italians rounded up from depots and hospitals around Madrid. It was a miserable formation, Guard in name only. As a literary note we must finally point out that the Dutch did not lose an eagle during the campaign. The novel "Sharpe's Eagle" has Sharpe capturing a standard the Dutch did not have at the time.

This French Army was one of the last really good forces the French got together in Spain. Despite a year of fighting, and being starved to the bone, Victor's I Corps was still the crack formation that broke the Russian center at Friedland (some of the regiments had been at Eylau as well) and

it had lately caused the Spanish disaster at Medellin The cavalry divisions, although worn thin from endless escort duty, were also still in a league of their own in the Peninsula. The French problem laid in the disjointed command structure. Every Corps commander had became a law unto himself in Spain, and with Napoleon a continent away all cooperation was uneasy and plagued by petty intrigues and quarrels. Caught in the middle of this Joseph lacked the authority and skill to create a unified command and the problem was not solved until Soult was appointed commander of all French forces in Spain.

The Army of Extremadura, finally, is a mess to research and we do even not dream that we got it all right. The strengths of some formations are very much pure guesses as even the latest, top-notch, Spanish research is able to come up with even approximate regimental strengths. We are however eternally grateful to our friend José Manuel Rodríguez Gómez of Talavera (living in hex 14.05) who has done a spectacular job searching the mazes of Spanish military history.

Some points are worth noting.

After Medellin the surviving cadres had absorbed new recruits. This brought the old regular units up to strength but lowered their quality as well. In some cases units had also been renamed or split up in ways that are very hard to follow.
The "Provincial Militia" units were no shaky levies. The Provincial Militia was a part of the pre-war regular army, differing from the "Line Infantry" mostly in social make-up.
The Canarias regiment can be any of three different units named "Canarias" this or "Canarias" that, none who seem to have been even near the Tajo in July 1809.
The Extranjeros (Foreigner) Infantry probably includes what was left of the Walloon and Spanish Guard battalions who almost died to a man covering the retreat from Medellin.
The Leales de Fernando VII Militia was as raw a formation can get and had been recruiting in Talavera the days before the battle.
The Spanish cavalry divisions were a mess of small formations and some squadrons might have been detached at the time of the battle. All of them suffered from starved and untrained mounts. Still, the Rey regiment, commanded by the dashing Don José María de Lastres, carried out the only truly successful cavalry charge during the battle. All in all, the most extraordinary thing about the Army of Extremadura was that it still existed. It had suffered disastrous defeats and horrible maltreatment, it was starved to the bone and its soldiers lacked equipment and even clothes. Despite all this the army functioned, if somewhat erratically, during the campaign and its operations during the retreat from Talavera were very well conducted.

Making a map for the game was quite an easy job as the area is reasonably well mapped. A power dam covers the northern valley these days, but thanks to the work of hordes of British 19th century historians we are dealing with one of the world's best mapped underwater areas. The actual extent of vegetation was also a bit tricky make out. Several sources mention that by the time of the battle most trees in the neighborhood as well as the roofs of Talavera had been used as firewood by Victor's troops, but oddly enough the very same sources also often mentions this or that unit getting entangled in shrubbery. The simple explanation is probably that while thorns and such are useless for cooking they work quite well as barbed wire. Among others Fortescue's map from History of the British Army was very useful in sort these details out. As for the proper extent of the town, something that can be a nightmare to make out, José Manuel helped us with very good maps that even nailed down the names of churches and major streets. It is also worth noting that outside of the town very few structures has the fortress-like qualities most Central European farm has, most minor farms being shacks and nothing more.

The special rules were save for the command issues, quite easy to design once one remembered that that this is a brigade level game. As few armies of the Napoleonic wars are as surrounded by myth as the Spanish and British and it was an interesting task to figure out how to depict them without restoring to stereotypes. The Spanish army was indeed poorly trained and often badly led, but those legendary routs at the first sight of trouble were a thing of the past even by 1809. Besides those regiments that basically consisted of a flag, a fancy name and six hundred scared recruits, most units could put up a creditable fight unless they had been led into hopeless situations. Once we decided that the panic on the 27th (that might have been the entire Spanish left routing or just the Leales de Fernando VII feeling a bit jumpy, depending on who's story you want to trust) could be written off as one of those freak events game design should ignore, all we needed was a few rules to show the rather erratic behavior of the pure levies and the Spanish cavalry's dislike for charging cavalry.

We have avoided giving British infantry any super-powers and instead hope that players will provide the correct aggressive downhill behavior and not have any faith in static shooting matches. We are other hand exaggerating the effect of the Barker rifles at the battle, as most of those where parceled out in 50 man groups among the brigades. Besides, the legendary Light Division, a formation that when featured in its full glory will be a law unto itself, was not even at the battle.

After this the French Army was simple to depict, all that remained to show was the ups and downs of the ranking officers involved. Joseph had lost control over the events, was arriving late and had neither experience nor authority to get a new grip on things. Meanwhile, the experienced Victor had his blood up and forgot about both tactics and co-ordination, and Jourdan, perhaps the most experienced officer on the field, did not lift a hand to help his boss. In fact, Jourdan's counter in the game should probably be thought of more as the meager staff resources Joseph had to his disposal rather than Jourdan himself. Besides this note of explanation, the French command rules are quite self-explanatory.

On the Allied side the British divisional commanders committed some amazing blunders and the Spanish staff's flair for endlessly confirming and reconfirming orders caused some truly glacial reaction times (To this day no one can tell for sure when Albuerquerque moved north to support Hill.). Despite these problems Wellesley and Cuesta worked fine together during the battle, something most nationalistic narratives of the battle desperately try to overlook. There was surely no love lost between the two, and while they went through great pains to embarrass each other during the campaign they were both far to smart to start acting up on the battlefield. Anyhow, this was just a question of pouring dirt into the command rules. The hardest part was how to show Wellesley's flair for micro-management without shutting down the entire command system, and the way the rule work now is a compromise that will serve the British fine as long as he is defending on a not too wide frontage. Launching a big attack will be quite another matter.

The First Invasion of Spain

Geoffrey Wolfarth Having been cleared of any incompetence over the debacle of the Vimeiro armistice conditions, Wellesley returned to Lisbon on 22nd April 1809 as Commander-in-Chief of both the British and Portuguese armies. He took over from Sir John Craddock, who had been left with a force of 10,000 British troops in Portugal when Moore had marched of on the ill-fated advance that ended in the retreat to Couronna. He spent some time organising the Commissariat to solve the never-ending problem of how to supply his troops in inhospitable terrain, and when enough of Moore's old troops had returned he marched north with 18,000 men to "beat or cripple Soult." Soult, who had moved rather aimlessly south after Couronna, was now sitting with some 13,000 troops at Oporto in Northen Portugal. He intended to withdraw back to Spain and not to engage Wellesley, whom he thought could not cross the wide river Douro. But Wellesley, capitalising on the enterprise of his staff officers in finding small boats to ferry the men over the river, pushed Soult and his force unceremoniously out of the town and forced him to retreat over a goat track across the Sierra Do Sante Catalina, leaving behind their artillery, reserve ammunition, several eagles, a and military war chest containing some £50,000. After this success, Wellesley marched against the remaining French force threatening Portugal's eastern frontier. Victor, with 20,000 men, was lying at Merida. Victor had orders to attack Lisbon in conjunction with Soult once he moved south from Oporto, but for obvious reasons Soult could not move. Consequently, Victor did nothing other than observe a small covering force that Wellesley had previous sent in his direction and more relevantly the large Spanish army under Cuesta, which was manoeuvring to his south. Following his orders from London, Wellesley arranged with Cuesta, through prolonged and difficult diplomacy, to make a joint move towards Madrid with a view to inducing Victor and other nearby French forces to attack him. Although Cuesta was as "obstinate as any gentleman at the head of an army ought to be," the combined armies were eventually concentrated at Talavera, where on the 27th and 28th of July they were attacked by the combined corps of King Joseph, Victor and Sebastiani. In the battle, the French virtually ignored the Spanish and concentrated their attack on the troops of the British and their German allies. The French made several attacks that were bloodily repulsed with some 7,000 casualties. However, having received news that another Spanish army was possibly moving against their rear, the French withdrew, leaving Wellesley and Cuesta in possession of the battlefield. However, no pursuit took place since the British, having lost a quarter of their troops, were too exhausted, and the Spanish simply refused. The Light Brigade, under Crauford, having marched more than 40 miles in 26 hours, arrived at the scene. Although they were too late to fight, they took over the exhausting and gruesome task of collecting the dead and tidying up the battlefield. The British stayed at Talavera for six days but were desperately short of food, since the Spanish authorities had failed to deliver the promised supplies, and eventually Wellesley decided to withdraw back to Portugal. He was obliged to do so, since from a captured despatch he had learnt that Soult was advancing against his communications with Portugal, gathering troops from Asturias and Leon on the way. Indeed, about the time when Wellesley received this intelligence, there had already been a cavalry skirmish some 35 miles to the west of Talavera, and Soult had reached Plasencia. The British marched away westward along the south bank of the Tajo, with the Light Brigade dashing ahead to secure the vital bridge at Almaraz, which was the only crossing by which Soult could have intercepted them. By the end of August Wellesley and his troops were safe back in Portugal.

Por la Relijión, por la Patria, por Fernando VII. Vencer o morir 1

José Manuel Rodríguez Gómez

The main reason for the Talavera campaign was politics. In the summer of 1809 the Spanish Junta Central had, after suffering severe criticism for the defeats during the winter, managed to restore some order among the different factions fighting the French invaders. In fact the Junta Central seemed more and more like an actual government. But it needed to secure its prestige both among the Spanish people and towards its ally Great Britain. The Junta needed a victory and Cornel, the pro-British Minister of War came up with a plan to retake Madrid, that - if nothing else was achieved - held great symbolic value. Such an attack had as Cornel's saw it a fair chance of success as Napoleon was out of Spain, the two most dangerous French Corps (those commanded by Ney and Soult) were far to the North, in Galicia, and a British corps was at hand at Portugal. To recapture the Spanish capital Cornel envisioned a pincer movement using the Army of Extremadura, commanded by Gen. Gregorio Garcia de la Cuesta and the Army of La Mancha, commanded by Gen. Francisco Javier Venegas. Cuesta was to attack from the West, along the Royal Road from Extremadura and Venegas, at Despeñaperros, should attack from the South. Cuesta would be in command of the operation and he was supposed to be able to count on the support of Wellesley's British Corps that was to join him in his march on Madrid while Venegas distracted the French. On paper the plan had some merit. But things proved to be easier said than done. After the first meeting between the Allied commanders, at Puerto de Miravete on July 10th, it stood clear that Wellesley and Cuesta did not understand each other on several points. Firstly, Cuesta saw Wellington as an ally while Wellesley saw Cuesta 's Army as a barely useful auxiliary corps and also doubted Cuesta 's abilities. Furthermore, Wellesley got involved with pro-British officers in the Spanish army that conspired against Cuesta, aiming to get Wellesley named as Generalisimo of all Spanish forces. The two generals also viewed the campaign differently. For the Spanish nothing was more important than retaking the Kingdom's capital while for the British the campaign was just a small part of a grand scheme to defeat Napoleon and if Madrid was held by French at the end of the season or not did not matter much to them. Furthermore, as Great Britain's army was small and precious, Wellesley was not allowed to risk his units in hazardous operations. Relations between the Allies were also soured over logistical problems. The British army had had supply problems even while still inside Portugal and when the Junta directed the army through areas with ripe fields the British proved unable to help themselves the way a French or Spanish army would have done. Instead both armies were forced to rely on the poorly organized and stocked Spanish depots and for the British leaders this and the lack of transports, was seen as virtual insults. These things were to prove critical as the Tajo valley, where the armies were to fight, was completely depleted of even hay. The advance to Talavera was an easy task. Victor's French were outnumbered and, additionally, both allied armies were rested as well as still quite well supplied. But things changed when they were at Talavera. As Victor withdrew behind the Alberche Wellesley deployed his forces to attack, but Cuesta did not feel that an attack across a creek and up a hill against a well-prepared enemy was a good idea before guns could be brought up. While Wellesley and Cuesta argued Victor sneaked away.

1 For the Religion, for the Fatherland, for Ferdinand VIIth. Win or die. - Motto on the standard of the Spanish Guards' 4 th battalion.

At Talavera the Allied commanders were also informed that Venegas, for no apparent reason, had been delayed. In fact, Venegas was disobeying orders and was advancing not on Ocaña and Aranjuez as planned but on the easily defended town Toledo. Wellesley pointed out the difficulties of advancing without Venegas pressing on French left and also argued about the lack of supplies and transports for his own corps. This is an important point. Wellesley wrote in letters during the whole campaign that starvation was decimating his army and about the frustrating lack of importance the Junta Central paid to feeding the two armies. This was, as other British leaders recognised an exaggeration but served as the perfect excuse for Wellesley to avoid further advances in Cuesta 's support. Futhermore, Wellesley had begun playing a very dangerous game. Some of Cuesta's subordinate officers were very dissatisfied with his command and among them the most conspicuous was Lt. Gen. Alburquerque, a pro-British officer who was after Cuesta's command for himself. And Wellesley had fueled their conspiracies against Cuesta, thus opening a wider gap between the two commanders. With discontent stiring in his ranks, Cuesta decided to march on to Madrid as he had been ordered to do. But when he ran into the now advancing Victor on July 26th he realized that his army was both outnumbered and unable to stand up against the French, he reluctantly admitted not only to the danger his army was in but to the actual failure of the whole operation. The only chance for him to survive was to retreat to Talavera. There Wellesley had not been completely inactive but had instead planned how to fight a defensive battle against French. Cuesta submitted to the plan and battle was joined. The outcome of the battle is well known. But the defensive victory of the allied armies could not hide the failure of the grand plan. None of its goals had been achieved and not even the French retreat could change that. The Spanish troops fought well given the circumstances and the officers forgot their differences while facing the enemy. But these differences were the seeds for future dissidence that would affect not only the Army but also the Central Junta. And while the British soldiers fought very well, their officers had failed completely to understand the Spanish mind, the Spanish way to wage war and, most important, the Spanish motivations to continue on fighting after their heavy defeats. This lack of understanding did ballast the allied side just as much as Venegas ' movements did. The campaign ended with the Spanish defeat at Almonacid (August 11th), where Venegas army suffered heavy losses and was forced to retreat, the retreat of Wellesley 's corps to Portugal, a maneuver of his own device that left Cuesta alone to face Soult 's army (formed by three French corps, 2nd, 5th and 6th), something that led to defeat of Cuesta 's rearguard at Puente del Arzobispo (August 8th). Tired and ill, General Cuesta had a stroke that forced him to resign his command. At the beginning of 1810 he died in Badajoz.

The Madrid View

Anders Fager with Dave Jones

By the beginning of 1809 it was clear to Joseph Bonaparte, King of Spain,that his brother had set him up. Badly. Spain was an awful place, indifferent to his best intentions. Joseph's subjects loathed or even pitied him, and the same could be said about most of his army. The French generals in Spain did not even answer to him, but to Napoleon, and to add further insult, Joseph had received the rather uninspired Marshal Jourdan as his military advisor. Powerless to interfere, the two watched as the war in Spain had taken on a life of itself. Only the eastern and central parts of the country were relatively calm. The vital northeast was in firm French control; in Aragon, Suchet (V Corps) was fighting Blake; in Catalonia, St Cyr (VII Corps) was fighting to open the Barcelona road; and south of Madrid, Sebastiani (IV Corps) was watching the mountain passes to still hostile Andalusia and Valencia. Meanwhile, west of Madrid, Victor (I Corps) stood on the Tajo, eyeing Cuesta, who had been reinforced since Victor had crushed him at Medellin in March. In Leon, north of Madrid, Soult (II Corps) was recovering from being thrown out of Portugal; and, north of him, Ney (VI Corps) was chasing guerrillas with Mortier (III Corps) coming up from Zaragosa to join him in what proved to be yet another shadow-hunt. Napoleon, busy at the villages Aspern and Essling in distant Austria, did not offer much advice, and the few orders that reached Spain were ill-informed and outdated. But nobody felt like telling the Emperor that his plan of capturing Gibraltar by the way of Oporto and Lisbon was pure nonsense. Instead his orders were acted upon either with extreme discretion or not at all. By quiet agreement the French commanders seem to have decided to wait and see; and it is somehow telling that Ney and Soult, the most distinguished commanders present, did the least good. In April Napoleon had ordered the two to pacify Galicia, but their offensive came to nothing, as they spent all their time quarrelling. (It got to a point were they almost drew their swords at each other and had to be restrained.) Then, just as thing had calmed down in early July, Napoleon made Soult commander of all three corps in Galicia. Ney went ballistic again and this embarrassing farce shut the entire army down for another couple of weeks. On the Tajo, Marshal Victor spent most of his time trying to keep his troops from starving to death. Since mid-April he had started to suspect that Cuesta was up to something, but the guerrillas that controlled the countryside kept him from finding out about the approach of the British. Just to be safe Victor drew his corps together at Talavera and sent repeated pleas for reinforcements. But Joseph ignored him, as he was busy trying to make sense of what Venegas' Army of La Mancha was up to south of Madrid. Wellesley and the British Army had entered Spain on July 4, but it was not until about two weeks later that Victor realised this, and, screaming for help, made preparations to retire. This news reached Madrid on the 22nd; and, at the same time, letters from Soult arrived reporting that the British seemed to be advancing up the Tajo. Soult also proposed that he should march south through the Pass of Banos to Plasencia and the Tajo, cutting Wellesley off from Portugal. Joseph agreed, as he had learnt that a happy Soult carrying out his own designs was preferable over a sulking one. Thus, having launched some 35,000 men at the Allied rear and effectively destroyed their plan of campaign, King Joseph set about to aid Victor. Many unflattering observations have been made about the military skills of Joseph Bonaparte, but he was no fool. He understood the situation well and gave Sebastiani's corps and the other formations around Madrid orders worthy of his brother. He would march with every man at hand to Victor's aid, while Venegas, correctly identified as the decoy of the allied plan, was to be all but ignored. Only a small garrison under Bellaird was left to guard the capital. When Wellesley's and Cuesta's troops appeared before Talavera on July 24, Victor retreated behind the Alberche river. He made a bold show the next day, but withdrew before he was attacked. When Victor shrunk away east towards Madrid on the evening of the 25th, all Allied hopes of destroying his corps were gone. Stuck in a logistical Black Hole, their most prudent action would have been to call the offensive off and retire. But instead, Cuesta decided to advance on Madrid, and on the 26th he ran into Victor, who had linked up with Joseph and was heading west again. After a furious cavalry engagement the Spanish got a head start back towards Talavera. Considering the chaotic French command structure, they had initially reacted amazingly well to the British advance. No one had deliberately ignored or obstructed Joseph, and even Soult operated with a purpose. But with victory within reach, everything changed for the worse. The pursuit on the 27th was conducted by Victor's infantry alone, without the support of the powerful cavalry divisions. The tired French failed to catch up with Cuesta on the 27th, and the trap sprung at Casa de Salinas only hurt British's pride. In effect Victor fought the Allied armies by himself, and, had Wellesley only realized this, I Corps could have been in great danger. The French command problems persisted through the battle at Talavera. Joseph neither supported nor restrained Victor's energetic attacks, and, except for the final furious assault the veteran I Corps fought the allies alone. It is easy to blame Victor for being rash and headstrong, but he was most likely assuming that because he was in contact with the enemy, and knew the area well, he was to be trusted to make the right decisions until Joseph had grasped the situation. (This "letting the man on the spot be the boss" method had worked remarkably well at other times. At Montebello 1800 Victor had allowed Lannes,

whom he outranked, to make use of his corps as it arrived, letting Lannes run the battle.). It is likewise easy to understand Joseph's refusal to order a final attack, as he had just learnt that Soult was delayed and Venegas was showing signs of life. At nightfall the French withdrew east, with Victor resuming his position of the 25th. From a French perspective the battle at Talavera was a total failure, and the horrible mauling they dealt the British was in every bit returned in kind. On the other hand there is no doubt that while the Allies won the battle and thus got Joseph's army to leave them alone, their campaign was already a complete failure. In fact, had the battle not been fought Wellesley would have had nothing to show for his pains, a situation reminiscent of the aftermath of both Corona and Salamanca. Now the spectacle of battle made people forget that in the end the French trap slammed shut. Soult did chase the British out of Spain; and had Wellesley lingered longer than he did at Talavera, he would probably had been doomed. In the end it was the Spanish who had to bear the French wrath alone, with Venegas being beaten at Almonacid and Cuesta at Puente del Arzobispo. The campaign's consequences were far-reaching and mostly unintended, well in line with the operational confusion. The only part of Spain that was liberated by the campaign was Galicia in the far Northwest, because as Ney withdrew to follow Soult, La Romana and others quickly re-established Spanish control. The experience of dealing with Cuesta and the Junta convinced Wellesley that co-operating with the Spanish was hopeless, and that he should limit himself to defending Portugal until unity of command and superior local strength was achieved. The privations of his troops also made him aware of the monstrous supply problems that an advance into Spain faced, and it took him years of meticulous preparations to create a sound foundation for an offensive. As for the Spanish Army, Cuesta led his men to safety before he left his command in August. Sick and unable to even hold an administrative post, he retired. He died soon afterwards. His replacement, Areizaga, was put in charge of the largest Spanish Army of the entire war, and promptly led it to its utter destruction. On the 19th November he faced Soult at Ocana south of Madrid; and, in a few hours fighting, the Army of the Centre ceased to exist. The creation of a large French army under one commander (Soult) was perhaps the only far-reaching effect the Talavera campaign had on the French, and, after crushing Areizaga, Soult's command was soon put to further use. The next year his command would invade Andalusia and eventually get bogged down in three years of the same kind of war as the French had been trying to win in Galicia.

French Players Notes

As the French Player you have a fine army with good units of all arms and both your cavalry and artillery is far superior to anything the Allies got. Unfortunately your host is led by the hesitant King Joseph and to makes things worse it arrives pell-mell to the battlefield with Joseph bringing up the rear. This is far from an ideal situation and victory will depend on how good you are at getting the army to function despite this. Early in the game, after chasing Mackenzie out of Casa de Salinas, you'll have to make a key decision and that is "which way to go?" The historical choice is to follow Victor 's plan of capturing Cerro de Medellin. This means throwing yourself at the best defensive position on the board guarded by the enemy's best troops, but that is a risk you have to take. With a bit of patience you can work your way up the valley of Casa de Valdefuentes to broaden your front, but sooner or later you need to charge uphill. At the very least you will seriously damage the British army and with a bit of luck capture the hill as well. And if you succeed in winning the Medellin, victory is yours as from there it is downhill all the way to the Tajo. Adieu Lord Wellington. But be careful, because if you enthusiastically wreck I Corps at an early stage your attacks on the July 28th will suffer as the Allied army will be free to re-deploy his reserves against what you have left. As an alternative to this "go get them-approach" you may prefer to keep up a more even pressure on the Allies, starting at first light of July 28th. Select a key point carefully and start to maul it. The area between Pajar de Vergara and the Medellin is a great killing ground for your artillery to play on, and with patience you can grind down the defenders and create a hole for you troops to attack into. An attack on or just north of Pajar de Vergara can smash the center of the Allied line, allowing you to envelop at least part of one of the two Allied armies. That is, if you can keep your flanks properly guarded. Do not expect the Allies to sit idle and watch your clever moves. Trying to ignore the British and attacking only the Spanish army is not a such a wise move as it might seem. Fighting in the shrubbery west of Talavera is slow and renders your artillery useless. So is fighting along the sunken road or in the town itself. Also, the Allied player may spring the "Enough" rule on you, leaving you with little to show for your efforts as it near impossible to catch enough of the fleeing Spanish army to make your effort worthwhile. Also, remember to use your cavalry and reserve units, even though they are awkward to get moving thanks to Joseph's limited capabilities. They have not come to Talavera just to watch I and IV Corps fight. Desolles' division can be used to man part of the French line, thus saving regiments for the main attacks and may also be put to good use as a "breakthrough reserve" to be unleashed westwards. As the terrain gets less and less cavalry-friendly the further west the fighting moves it can be hard to put the Dragoons to good use, but in a perfect world you will manage to get them into action before the British has taken cover behind the Portina. Two final pieces of advice. Learn to live with the squabbling French generals and put all of them to work, not only Victor. Do not refrain from ordering something just because it will take some time to get it done. And, do not underestimate the Spaniards. They have a number of quality units that properly used can threaten your flanks or turn a setback into a rout by a sudden cavalry charge.

Allied Players Notes

It is a demanding exercise for the Allied player to simultaneously command these two utterly different armies, and it is even more difficult to co-ordinate their actions. But this is a key point for you as no matter what their commanders think, the armies need each other's support. They have to co-operate, and there is one thing worse than having an ally and that is, as Churchill once said, having none. Playing the Allies there are three things you have to keep in mind. First: the Spaniards are soldiers too. You need them. Second: your reserves are very limited. Three: the Medellin can be outflanked both from the North or South. Remember these points and you will be fine. Sort of. The French will come at you like a crazed pitbull, so brace yourself. Be prepared to defend the Medellin and Pajar de Vergara to the last man as the loss of these will spell your defeat. Properly manned, with artillery in support and local reserves at hand, they are both fine strongpoints for the French divisions to break against. Also, note that unless you want conduct a massive regrouping with the mercurial Victor as a spectator you are stuck with the British on the Medellin and the Spanish around the Pajar. Learn to live with it. Quick movements are tricky among the olives west of the Portina, something that will cause endless frustration, not only for you but for any French breakthrough as well. Husbanding reserves and forming a second line is a hard task. Besides one of the weaker British divisions, you'll have one good Spanish division and a few cavalry units to spare and that is about it. A retreat behind Talavera's walls will also free one division to act as reserve behind the right wing of Allied lines. Be aware that if the French starts working the northern flank of the Medellin it will take time to get fresh troops up there. Finally, do not allow the French player to think he has the initiative. Counterattack if you have clear chances to do so. Good luck and good gaming.

Battle Notes

Jerry Malone On the morning of July 27th, the Army of Extremadura crossed the Alberche in some disorder. Sherbrooke's and Mackenzie's divisions were on the eastern bank of the river in case the French renewed their pursuit, but Victor had decided to slow down to rest his men and horses. As the last of the Spaniards reached the west bank of the Alberche, French cavalry were spotted to the east. Wellesley ordered Sherbrooke's division to retire and proceed to its position north of Talavera, while Mackenzie was ordered to move over the Alberche and halt near the ruined, fortress-like structure of Casa de Salinas. The Britsh fell back, burning several buildings along the river. At Casa de Salinas Mackenzie's two brigades used the shade of the trees to escape the July sun and tried to rest. They were unaware that Victor's van, Lapisse 's Division, had used the smoke from the fires to cross the Alberche undetected. Therefore the British were taken completely by surprise when the 16 Light attacked, killing some men before they could rise. Wellesley, who had climbed to the roof of the casa, narrowly escaped capture. Donkin's inexperienced brigade was broken, with some of the shaken troops firing on each other amidst the confusion. The French overran the 2/31st of Mackenzie's brigade as well, while the 5/60th, though shaken, stood firm long enough for Wellesley to begin to restore some sense of order. He brought forward the 45th, the veteran " Old Stubborns", and created a rallying point for his troops. As the French attack slowed down, Donkin's shaken command reformed and, with Wellesley temporarily in command, Mackenzie's division retreated to the line along the Portina, supported by Anson's cavalry. French artillery harassed the retreating redcoats, but the action was at an end. This short but sharp action had cost the British 440 casualties and the French less than 100. The Allied position was an area well known to both sides, as Victor had used Talavera as a base until a few days before. The Allied right was anchored on the ghost town of Talavera, and the line travelled north along a mostly dry stream, the Portina, to the Cerro de Cascajal, a hill that commanded the battlefield. Though both flanks

were secure, the center was deployed in open terrain with little or no cover. Though Talavera's walls were in a state of disrepair, they could still provide protection against an attack. Deployed east of them were the Spanish Van and 1st Divisions, and four regiments of cavalry continued the line to the Tagus. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th Divisions then stretched northward from the town to the Pajar de Vergara in a double line, where they met Wellesley's right. The Spanish position was made stronger by vineyards, walls, and enclosures that would aid in defense. In reserve behind these troops were 10 regiments of Spanish cavalry and Bassecourt's 5th Division. The Pajar de Vergara, roughly in the center of the Allied position, was a small knoll with the most rudimentary of fortifications erected upon it. Wellesley and Cuesta had decided that this portion of the battlefield would be Spanish responsibility, but a battery of 3 pounders under Lawson was placed there. On his left came the troops of Campbell's 4th Division, and, north of them, Sherbrooke's strong 1st Division was deployed in a single line. These troops held the most exposed portion of the line as they had no natural protection from enemy fire. To the rear of the 1st Division was Mackenzie's battered Division and the British cavalry. On the extreme left the most trusted of the British commanders, General Hill and his 2nd Division, held the Cerro de Medellin. Late in the afternoon Milhaud's dragoons advanced through the olive and cork trees to probe the Allied right. The troopers fired a few pistol shots and set into motion one of the more infamous Talavera incidents. Four raw Spanish battalions facing the dragoons fired off a volley and then promptly routed. Some two thousand troops ran from the field, but the Spanish officers quickly restored the line. As calm settled in over the field, the Allies tried to settle in and prepare themselves for battle the next morning. Most were exhausted by the last 15 hours of marching and skirmishing with little or no food. Unknown to Wellesley there was a near-fatal flaw in Hill's dispositions on the Cerro de Medellin. The brigades of Stewart and Tilson were placed far west of their intended place (the crest of the Cerro), and Langwerth and Lowe believed they were in the second line and had thrown only a token picket line out. Victor, on Cerro de Cascajal facing the Medellin, knew that the Medellin was key to the field. He was confident that the Allied army was worn out, as he had punished the Spanish, and the British had performed rather badly at Salinas. Night attacks were considered risky, but Victor thought that a surprise attack by Ruffin's tough veterans might push the British from the heights. In support Lapisse's division was ordered to create a noisy demonstration on the British center. Ruffin's troops got moving in battalion columns at 9:00pm. The 9th Light was to attack frontally, and the other two regiments were to seek out the British flanks and turn them. In the darkness a French column passed just to the north of Donkin's brigade but it was assumed to be friendly and no alert was sounded. As the 9th scrambled up the steep hill, they came upon the sleeping, unprepared men of Lowe's KGL brigade and routed them. Shouting "Allemande" and "Espanioles" as they attacked, two battalions of the 9th Light reached the crest and it seemed as if they would indeed capture the heights. Hill rushed to the scene. He mistakenly believed the troops to his front were the 3rd Foot until a French volley killed his aide. Cries of "the hill, the hill" ran through Stewart's' men and Stewart rushed his Battalion of Detachments forward. When Hill had formed up Stewart's remaining battalions, he led them forward to the east crest of the Medellin. The 9th Light was on top of the hill trying to sort itself out when the 29th Foot smashed into them and drove them off the hill. Volleys from the 29th and the 1st Battalion of Detachments then defeated the third battalion of the 9th and secured the hill. This ended Ruffin's attack as the 96th Line had got caught up volleying with Langwerth's men and the 24th Line had got lost in the darkness and north of the Medellin. Victor's gamble had cost both armies about 300 casualties. Wellesley used the rest of the night to organize his position on the Medellin while his men tried to get a few hours of sleep. The rumble of artillery pieces from the French lines kept many of them awake. During the night Senarmont, commander of I Corps' artillery, carefully deployed the French guns to create the most destructive fire zones. Some guns were pushed forward to within 600 yards of the Allied lines, and behind them, the corps' infantry formed. To the south Sebastiani's 4th Corps filed in, with Sebastiani's division, then Valence and lastly Leval's division of German troops. Milhaud's dragoons held the southern portion of the line and were the only troops facing the Spanish. Latour-Maubourg's dragoons were behind the 4th Corps. Undeterred by the results of the night attack, Victor was still confident of victory. He sent a note to Joseph, who was still hours away, that he could win by attacking with only I Corps. Joseph agreed to a new attack as long as 4th Corps did not participate. In a flurry of conditional orders, Victor planned his battle. Ruffin's tired troops were again to attack the Medellin and once the summit was gained, Lapisse and Villatte were to attack. Only then would the 4th Corps advance. At 5:00 am a single cannon fired the signal for French guns to open fire. Well-placed guns tore great gaps in the exposed British troops and the weak British artillery could not reply. Wellesley had made the troops on the Medellin fall back to the reverse slopes to escape the bombardment, but Sherbrooke's men had no such cover and had to withstand the barrage. Under the cover of mist and smoke, Ruffin's columns moved forward again. The French quickly scaled the hill's heights, only to meet Hill's six battalions. The first volley staggered the French, and, as they struggled to deploy into line their formations began to disintegrate. Sherbrooke sent the 5th Battalion of the KGL to flank the French, and Stewart on the Medellin ordered his troops to charge the reeling enemy. At the sight of the advancing British, the French broke and fled. In the forty minutes Ruffin's division had lost 1300 men, over 25% of their strength. Hill's command had suffered 750 casualties. As Hill had been wounded slightly in the head Tilson assumed command of the division. On the hill opposite, Victor called off further attacks. The French artillery continued firing for the next hour, then ceased. By now the July sun was beating down on both armies and an informal truce was called to collect the wounded and water from the Portina. In a scene to be repeated many times throughout the war, the British and French troops, who only minutes before had been enemies, met and fraternised for a couple of hours. About 10:00 am Joseph and Jourdan arrived at Victor's headquarters. Joseph, who was in overall command on a battlefield for the first time, was very composed. In the hour-long conference Victor firmly held the opinion that an attack with both corps could defeat the Allied army. Other officers present were not so confident. Jourdan felt another frontal attack would fail and argued that Victor should have turned the British by occupying the narrow valley north of Cerro de Medillin. The decision was further complicated by the fact that the same day Soult was scheduled to arrive at Plasencia, effectively cutting the British off from Portugal. News from Madrid had also arrived that Venegas was at last moving toward the capital and the token force watching him could only hold out for a couple of days. Finally the ever-present shadow of Joseph's brother forced an aggressive move, and Joseph approved an attack by the 1st and 4th Corps, supported on the right by a cavalry division. As the French conferred, Wellesley strengthened his position. He sent Fane's and Anson's cavalry to the valley north of the Medellin and repositioned half of a KGL battery to cover the area. Cuesta, whose relationship with Wellesley's had so far been contentious and strained, promptly sent Bassecourt's 5th Division, a half battery of 12 pounders, and Albuquerque's cavalry division north. Bassecourt's men took position in the northern valley and on the slopes of the Sierra de Segurilla. Albuquerque's division started north but arrived after the next action had already begun. The French planned a general attack all along the line. Ruffin and Villatte, supported by Merlin's cavalry, would move up the valley between the Cerro de Medellin and the Sierra de Segurilla. All the other divisions were to attack the British line from the Pajar de Vergara northward, with only some cavalry, Dessolles' brigade, and the Royal Guard held in reserve. At 2:00pm, 80 French guns opened fire on the British line again. Luckily for the British, the cannonade was over quickly and a screen of

tirailleurs emerged from the smoke. Only on the Cerro de Cascajal did the French artillery remain firing, as Victor had decided to see how the rest of the attack fared before moving Ruffin and Villatte forward. Leval's Germans on the French left hit the Allies first at the Pajar de Vergara. The division, originally deployed in battalion columns, had lost most of its formation in their advance through the shrubbery and appeared as a mass of skirmishers when it emerged from the trees only 200 yards from the Pajar de Vergara's ten guns. Leval's right confronted the British portion of the line, his left the Spanish troops. The Germans facing the British tried repeatedly to advance in the face of the canister and volleys; and, when the Baden troops in the center began to fall back, the British charged. Leval's right dissolved back into the bushes, and the British captured a battery of guns that had been brought forward. The Germans facing the Spanish were also repulsed, and, seeing the rest of their division retreating, followed suit. Leval rallied his troops on his Polish regiment, having lost between 600 and 700 men in 45 minutes. Campbell's casualties numbered 236 and the Spanish no more than 180. To the north Sherbrooke's troops had suffered through another cannonade before Lapisse and Sebastiani's Divisions began moving against them. Both divisions came on with their first line in columns of divisions and their second line in columns of battalions. The French crossed the Portina and braced for the British to fire. As opposed to the noisy way in which the French attacked, the silence of the British increased an already nerve-rattling experience, and it was not until the French were 50 yards away that Sherbrooke gave the order to fire once and then charge. The charge destroyed the French front ranks (some regiments losing a third of their men in a matter of minutes) and broke the two divisions. But this spectacular success caused the crisis of the battle and almost led to the defeat of the Allied army. The British charge went out of control as Sherbrooke's men chased the French over the Portina. The KGL troops reached the slopes of the Cerro de Cascajal with the Guards not far behind. Only Cameron managed to halt his men on the east bank of the Portina. Now the disordered German and British came upon formed French troops; and, with no cohesion and unprotected flanks, they were easy prey. Artillery enfiladed the KGL troops, killing Langwerth. Dragoons slashed at the Guards, and the six battalions fought for their lives as they tried to reach the safety of the British lines. Cameron tried to cover the retreating masses but it was obvious that the Allied center was gone. The 2nd KGL had suffered 50% casualties, 5th KGL over 100 prisoners, and the Guards lost 611 out of 2000 men. Wellesley reacted quickly and moved Mackenzie and the 1/48th into the Guards' old position, and had Cotton's cavalry to guard his flank. The victorious French troops came rushing towards them, and, in the firefight that ensued, Mackenzie and Lapisse were killed, along with the 1/48th's colonel. The British suffered 632 casualties but held, and, prompted by a charge by Cotton, they forced the French to retreat. Sebastiani's troops were finished for the day. They had lost all of their colonels, 60% of their chef de battalions, 70 officers of other ranks and 2100 men. Lapisse's division was equally mauled, losing 69 officers and 1700 men. At 4:00pm, as the fighting was at its height, Leval was ordered to attack once again to extend Sebastiani's flank. The battered Germans attacked with little enthusiasm and Campbell pushed them back even further, while the Spanish left their lines to pour a flanking fire into the retreating troops. Finally, the Regimiento del Rey charged Leval's left flank, broke them, and rode on to capture 4 French guns that had been brought up to aid the assault. Meanwhile, things were relatively quiet on the hills. Victor, watching the developments, was content to keep up a steady cannonade that punished Hill's troops. The British pulled back over the crest, and Victor turned to his long overdue outflanking move. But in the valley north of the hills the Allied now numbered 5000 infantry and an equal number of cavalry. Still, Ruffin's wrecked regiments moved along the Sierra de Segurilla's slopes, with Cassagne's brigade of Villatte's division and Merlin's cavalry in support. As they advanced they came under artillery fire from the Medellin, and as British cavalry started to move against them they deployed into squares near the Casa de Valdefuentes. Anson's brigade charged the French, but unknown to the British a small ravine was hidden in their path. The 23rd Light Dragoons came upon the ravine and horses and men crashed into it. Some troopers managed to jump the obstacle only to face the point-blank fire from the French squares; while behind them, the German 1st Light Dragoons managed to stop short of the ravine. Both the 23rd and the Germans rallied and attacked the French squares again with little effect. Some squadrons of the 23rd, led by their colonel, charged past the squares to attack Merlin's cavalry. Merlin's front line allowed the British to pass and, completely surrounded by seasoned French cavalry, the 23rd was annihilated. Only a few officers and 2 or 3 troopers of the isolated squadrons reached safety. All in all, the 23rd had lost 207 men of 450. It was sent back to England and never served in the Peninsula again. The French troops in the valley had seen enough and pulled back, ending the fighting. As a tragic postscript, grass fires at the foot of the Medellin burned many wounded to death before they could be pulled to safety. Although three hours of light remained, the armies were exhausted and the battle was over. Joseph refused to commit his remaining reserves to another attack, as Victor wanted. He was concerned with Venegas's threat to Madrid, and he had also received word that Soult was still far from Plasencia. Orders for a withdrawal were issued and by dusk the army was moving away to the east. The Allies had won the battle but had suffered far greater in terms of percentage. The French had suffered 7268 casualties, and the British army had lost over 25% of its effectives, for a total of 5365 men. Spanish casualties were around 500. Wellesley, soon to be anointed Viscount Wellington for his victory, had handled his army well, seemingly everywhere at every crisis, and Cuesta had provided the necessary support without any friction. On the other hand, the French had done their best to prove Napoleon's thesis that "lions led by sheep will always be defeated by sheep led by lions".

Vimeiro Game Rules

1.0 General Rules

1.1 Counter Nomenclature

The counters of the different nationalities that took part in the battle are coloured as follows: France : Dark Blue on Light Blue Britain : Dark Blue on Red Portugal : Red-Brown on Tan Hanover : Red on Light Blue

Brigades are named after either their commander or their largest regiment. Commanders' names are written in italics and regimental names are in normal style.

1.2 The Atlantic

No units may enter all-ocean hexes. Units forced to retreat into an all-ocean hex are destroyed. Beach hexes are treated as normal open terrain and so does "The Landing."

2.0 British Special Rules

The British Army of Portugal had been in existence for just three weeks. It had only been organized into brigades and Wellesley created ad hoc divisions around trusted brigadiers as need arose. Its train and artillery were terribly short of draught animals and its Portuguese allies were lacking even clothes. To make things worse, Wellesley's timid superior Burrard had just arrived and was off-shore aboard HMS Brazen eating breakfast as Junot approached.

2.1 General

Infantry brigades may not be given independent orders. Artillery and cavalry units may move about freely within 8 Commander MP's of the Army HQ. If Wellesley should become a casualty he is temporary replaced by either Ferguson or Hill until Burrard arrives. Should Burrard be killed either Ferguson or Hill will replace him (Wellesley is considered to be sulking and bent on avoiding any further involvement).

2.2 Wreckage

For the purpose of divisional wreckage consider the British army a "super division" that is wrecked when five infantry brigades have been wrecked (four if anyone but Wellesley is in command). This army wreckage only affects Burrard and victory conditions.

2.3 Temporary Divisions

Temporary Divisions can be formed around the commanders Hill, Ferguson and Crawfurd who are kept off-board until called up to lead one. Temporary Divisions consist of the commanders' brigade, up to two other brigades and may include one artillery unit. Temporary Divisions are formed by sending an order (by aide or in person) to the commander's brigade. The order must state which brigades and artillery units are to be included in the Division along with the commanders' brigade as well as what this temporary formation is supposed to do. When the order is accepted the commander is placed with his brigade and starts to function as a Divisional Commander. If the Temporary Division fails a Stoppage Check, carries out a Loose Cannon result, or the Commander becomes a casualty, the Division ceases to exist and the Commander counter is removed. Temporary Divisions may not be created by using initiative but may use it while in existence.

2.4 Moving Brigades

IInfantry brigades not assigned to Temporary Divisions are considered to be on automatic "defend in place" orders and may not move at all except to move one hex into close combat. They may also still change formation and facing, send out skirmishers and extensions, as well as obey morale results. But the only way the brigade's "main counter" may move is by moving along with Wellesley as he moves. While directing brigades, Wellesley himself only pays Commander MP's for the movement between hexes, not for such things as formation changes. He can move to one brigade, move it for a couple of hexes and then move over to another brigade and move it if desired. He does not need to follow a unit into close combat. All he has to do is to move it up next to the enemy.

2.5 Sir Harry Burrard

Roll one die at the beginning of each British Command Phase starting on the 10:30 am turn. On a roll of 1 or 2 Burrard will appear at the Army HQ and take command. When this happens Wellesley is removed from the map, any orders in transit are cancelled and any temporary division in existence suffers an automatic stoppage. Play then proceeds as

normal, with Burrard commanding the army in the same way as Wellesley. If the British army is wrecked when Burrard's arrival is called for, Burrard will wait in the wings for the Army to recover before taking over.

2.6 Infantry Training

Neither British or Portuguese infantry units may use Combat Columns.

2.7 The Light Infantry

The "A" morale British skirmisher may move up to three hexes away from any other friendly non-skirmisher.

2.8 Lack of Horses

The British Army artillery is restricted to moving no more than three hexes in a turn. The wagons may not move at all.

2.9 Case Shot

Being equipped with the new spherical case shot British artillery pieces enjoys a +1 die roll modifier when firing at artillery units.

3.0 The French Army

3.1 General

All commanders have their command ratings reduced by one when rolling for initiative, regardless of who is in command. If Junot should become a casualty, Kellerman takes over, followed by either Loison or DeLaborde.

The French player may freely reassign brigades between commanders, as long as no commander controls more than one brigade more than he controlled at the start of the scenario. French artillery may either move freely within 8 Commander MP's of Army HQ or be assigned to a division.

3.2 Infantry Training

All French infantry units may use combat columns. (Including the Legion de Midi, should it be used.)

4.0 Scenario

4.1 General

All the rules in Series Rules apply. Units may not deploy skirmishers before the scenario starts.

4.2 The Battle of Vimeiro, 21st August 1808

The British expedition to Portugal was nineteen days old when the sun rose over the village of Vimeiro at Maceria Bay some 55 kilometers north of Lisbon. The French Army of Portugal under General Junot, Portugal's ruler for the last nine months, was approaching. Trapped in a hostile land with the nearest friendly troops far East of Madrid, Junot had decided to make a serious attempt to drive the British back into the sea.

General Information First turn: 8:00 am Last turn: 6:00 pm (or earlier) Total Game Length: 21 turns First Player: French

French Information

Reinforcements: At 8:00 am, Entry Area A: Junot, Army HQ, 26 Chasseurs M, L Div, Army (2Lh) At 8:30 am, Entry Area A: D Div, M Div, Army (4Lf) At 9:00 am, Entry Area A: K Div, Army (2Hf)

Variable Beginning at 12:00 am, roll one dice during each French Command Phase. On a roll of six the 3/66th Line enters at Entry Area A.

Orders: Army HQ is to move to 38.12. All other formations are to move to within 2 hexes of Army HQ and await further orders. The 3/66th Line might be attached to any division.

British Information

Set up: (All units may be set up in any desired facing or formation and with extensions and skirmishers deployed as per the regular rules.) Hex: Units: 2.10 1-Hill, Hill 5.10 5-Crawfurd, Army (Lf) 6.11 8-Acland 9.08 3-Nightingall 11.11 4-Bowes 11.16 Train Unit 13.13 Army HQ, Wellesley 13.12 2-Ferguson 15.16 Trant, Army (Lf) 15.13 Train Unit 15.10 20 LtD, Cavalry 17.09 7-Anstruther, 20.10 6-Fane, Army (Lf)

Burrard, Crawfurd and Ferguson are placed of-map and can enter the game as per the special rules.

Orders: Hill commands his own brigade, one battery, as well as Crawfurd and Acland's brigades. His orders are to defend the hill west of Vimeiro against attacks from the south.

Victory Conditions While the British goals in the battle were obviously to survive and stay ashore in Portugal, Junot's objectives were murkier. He went into battle without a third of his army and when repulsed, he sued for terms. Still, had Junot somehow managed to cripple the British they would quite likely been forced to evacuate Portugal.

Ending the Game Play proceeds until either the French Player wins an Automatic Victory; until a Ceasefire is called; or until 06:00 pm when an Automatic Ceasefire occurs.

Automatic French Victory If at any instant the French player has managed to destroy both the British train units as well as wreck five infantry brigades (four if Wellesley is not in command), he wins an automatic victory. The British will call a cease fire in order to negotiate a safe evacuation and Junot will become known as the general who threw the British out of the Iberian Peninsula.

Ceasefire During any British Command Phase after the 12:00 pm turn that Burrard (or his replacement) is in command the British player may call a Ceasefire provided that no close combat was fought in the preceding French Player Turn. The Game ends immediately and Victory Points (VP's) are counted to establish the victor.

The British Player gets: 1 VP per wrecked French Division. 2 VP per permanently wrecked French Division (instead of the above). 1 VP for forcing the French Army HQ to displace. 2 VP for holding entry hex A when the Ceasefire is ordered.

The French Player gets: 1 VP per wrecked enemy Infantry Brigade. 2 VP per permanently wrecked enemy Infantry Brigade (instead of the above). 2 VP per British train unit destroyed. 1 VP for holding Vimeiro Hill (both hexes) when the Ceasefire is ordered. 2 VP for having "The Landing" within LOS and effective range of a French artillery unit when the Ceasefire is ordered.

Subtract the French score from the British score and compare with the table below.

+7 or more: A Major British Victory as Junot surrenders unconditionally and he and his army are marched off to prison.

+2 to +6: A Minor British Victory as Junot surrenders but manages to negotiate safe (British) transport for his army back to France. -1 to +1: An inconclusive draw and the campaign drags on as Junot withdraws to Lisbon pursued by the cautious Burrard.

2 or less: A French Minor victory that buys time for Junot as Burrard withdraws to Oporto to lick his wounds.

The historical result was + 3 or 4.

5.0 Variants

5.1 No Breakfast/Early Lunch

Burrard either skips breakfast to lead the army from the start of the battle or he stays off-shore until the afternoon. In the first case Burrard replaces Wellesley who is removed altogether (unless Burrard is killed) and the British player earns 2VP. In the second case do not start rolling for Burrard until 1:00 pm and give the French player 1 VP.

5.2 Travot's Division

Junot's largest mistake was perhaps that he kept a lot of troops scattered in forts around Lisbon instead of throwing everything he had at Wellesley. This variant assumes that he brought the nearest of these to the battlefield. Ignore the entry of the 3/66th and instead start rolling in the same way for Travot's Division at 10:00 am. The division enters at Entry Area A with orders to move to army HQ. This gives the British player 3 VP.

5.3 Variable Entry

The French player may have one Division enter at Entry Area B or C with an accepted order one turn later that it was otherwise supposed to arrive. This gives the British player 1 VP.

5.4 Junot Wakes Up!

Junot realizes that he is about to fight a major battle and takes a firmer grip on things. Ignore the initiative restrictions of 3.1 and all French Divisions may enter with accepted orders. This gives the British player 2 Vp.

5.5 Random Events

Use these together with the random events rules found in the Series Rules.

Die	British	French
1	The Brave Two Hundred	Reshuffle Brigades
2	Ross Lands	Junot Wakes Up
3-4	Three Generals	No Event
5	No Event	Swiss Desertion
6	Heat	Heat
The Brave Two Hundred . When the battle
was already won the Wellesly unleashed the
20th Dragoons in a typical British suicidal

Reshuffle Brigades . After the orders to attack had been given Junot suddenly (for no apparent reason) thought that his divisions were somehow unbalanced in strength. When this result is rolled Loison must immediately send one of his brigades to DeLaborde and vice versa. When done this reshuffling is permanent.

Ross Lands . Colonel Ross, commander of the 20th Regiment and two and a half company of his regiment was adrift on the Atlantic while the battle was fought. When this result is rolled Ross and his men has managed to get ashore and joined Aucland. Add two boxes to Aucland's brigade or erase two boxes of permanent casualties from it.

Junot Wakes Up Some people has blamed Junot's poor generalship on the head wound that later quite likely drove him to suicide. When this result is rolled Junot suddenly realizes that he is in the middle of a battle and takes a firmer grip on things. He may immediately issue one round of orders as if he were a level "4" leader and the –1 on initiative is ignored for the rest of the game.

Three Generals . The British leadership acts up in one way or another. If Burrard has landed, roll one dice. On a roll of 1 Burrard recalls Wellesly to run the battle for the rest of the scenario. On a roll of 2 or 3 Burrard disappears from the field for one turn to quarrel with Wellesly. On a roll of 4 Burrard can use Wellesly as a Temporary Divisional Commander for the rest of the game. On a roll of 5 or 6 one randomly determined Infantry Brigade not assigned to Temporary Division suffers a loose cannon result. An unit so affected may move while under that order.

Swiss Deflection . At Rollica three days earlier most of DeLaborde's Swiss troops changed sides in the middle of the fight, taking shelter among Nightingall's brigade that broke as a consequence. If this result is rolled the Swiss troops still brigaded with the 86th Ligne decides to change sides. The 86th Ligne immediately loses one permanent casualty and the nearest British infantry unit (up to a maximum of three hexes away) suffer a M-2 result.

Heat . The 21th of August was so hot that the French fought in just their waistcoats. When this result is rolled the Portuguese summer takes its toll on things. One complete turn elapses without anything happening, not even cease-fire calls. Just move the turn-marker one step ahead.

Historical Notes (Vimeiro)

In the fall of 1807 French and Spanish troops invaded Portugal to close the last continental ports open to British trade. The French Corps commanded by General Junot met no other resistance than its own faulty maps and after some gruelling marching, 1.500 footsore French grenadiers limped into Lisbon on November the 30th. Not a shot was fired and the Portuguese court and government fled to Brazil. In the following weeks Junot collected his 24.000 troops in central Portugal, disbanded the Portuguese army and settled down to enjoy vice-regal status, isolated from the rest of the world. This charade went on for almost half a year until the situation in Spain started to deteriorate. In the end of May 1808 Junot found himself cut of from communication with Madrid and his Spanish allies began to quietly withdraw back to Spain. In the middle of June the people of Oporto, Portugal's second town, exploded with riots that led to the formation of a Junta that eventually assumed the role of national government. The countryside rose and Junot's men soon found themselves engaged in a vicious war against a populace that rose again and again. Loison's massacre of the inhabitants of the Evora was the first of many such outrages. Then, on the 1st of August, a British fleet appeared outside Oporto and a 13.000 man strong army under General Wellesley started to disembark at Mondego Bay. Wellesley had somewhat vague orders to support any opposition against the French and he spent a week in Oporto, quarrelling with the Junta and trying to organize a commissariat. Aided by 2.000 Portuguese troops, he then cautiously moved south on the 9th. On the 17th he encountered the division of DeLaborde at Rollica 80 kilometres north of Lisbon. After fighting a skilled delaying action, DeLaborde got away and Wellesley marched southwest to Vimeiro to link up with the landing of another 4.000 British troops as well as his superior Sir Harry Burrard. Meanwhile Junot had started to assemble his army, but for some reason he decided to leave more than one third of it in garrison, marching against Wellesley with just about 14.000 troops. On the morning of the 21st he approached Vimeiro from the east, surprising Wellesley, who had expected an attack from the south. But Junot, usually a brave and quite rash officer, lost this advantage as he first hesitated and then committed

his Divisions to uncoordinated attacks. Loison was sent to attack Vimeiro hill but was thrown back by Fane and Anstruther. Meanwhile, DeLaborde, who was supposed to turn the British flank, was routed by Ferguson after a wild running fight around Ventosa. Undaunted, Junot sent Kellerman's grenadiers to attack Vimeiro itself, but they were outflanked by Acland's brigade and pushed back after some hand-to-hand fighting within the village. Wellesley then ended the fighting by unleashing his 250 cavalrymen on the retreating French. In true British cavalry tradition the 20th Light Dragoons almost managed to destroy themselves against some stone-walls, the French reserve artillery and Margaron's Dragoons.

At this hour Burrard appeared on the field and forbid any attempt to pursue Junot's men. Wellesley rode off in disgust and the British army sat down and had lunch. The next morning Junot sued for terms and Burrard and his superior, Sir Hew Dalrymle, who had also just appeared, gave Junot better terms than he could ever have expected. In the Convention of Clinta, Junot surrendered and his army was shipped back by British ships to Bayonne with all their arms and equipment, as well as their loot. Regardless of this odd arrangement, the British were now firmly established in Portugal. Sir John Moore took over command as all the other three British generals were called home to explain their conduct.

Despite being just a large skirmish by continental standards, Vimeiro was one of the most decisive battles of the Napoleonic wars. Had Junot won, the entire course of the war in Spain would have been much different. With no British army on the Peninsula it is unlikely that the Spanish would have been able to hold on as long as they did.

Game Notes

Vimeiro, like all Peninsula affairs involving British troops, is a very easily researched battle. There is one little question on who was brigaded with who in each army, but that is about it. Besides the fact the maps such as this is a mess to do, the only real problems with the game were the victory conditions and how to picture the arcane way the British army was led. For the latter case one can say that this is probably the only time in NBS that players will lead an army in 17th century-style, so enjoy it. The final version works nicely and shows Wellesley's hands- on, trust-no-one, leadership-style quite well. It also felt very nice to find that in the end we spent more rules on the awkward British command structure, than the wondrous Baker Rifle. NBS is after all about commanding armies.

The Victory Conditions were, despite the clear operational goals for each side, quite diffuse. People have blamed Junot's poor generalship on old wounds and alcohol, but it is more probable that he simply had no idea of what to do. And while history has proven Wellesley to be right he was also out on a limb with Britain's only field army (all nine brigades, yes!). In the end Burrard and Junot were quite pleased to settle things by talking, so in that way the battle was very much like those little skirmishes that "honor demanded" from besieged towns before they could surrender, and the victory conditions reflect that. Both sides can go for gold,

but be warned that brigades such as Anstruther's can mow down an entire French division in one charge and that while Margaron's cavalry is perfectly useless around Vimeiro, it will create havoc with any number of Thin Red Lines in the open.

Regarding the Baker Rifles, there were only a few of these around in 1808 and it was in the end not what made the 5/60th and 95th regiments unique anyhow. The difference was doctrinal and at this stage of the war this doctrine was in its infancy and several of the later-to-be famous light regiments had just been re-designated as "light." (Some of them where also about to lose their kilts, but as they hadn't been anywhere near England for a while the losing might not yet have happened.)

And it "Vimeiro" in Portugese. Despite that British Battle Honours read "Vimiera". And the French spell it "Vimeïro".

Order of Battle

Army of Portugal Lieutenant General Sir Arthur Wellesley

1st Brigade, Maj Gen. Rowland Hill (1/5th Northumberland, 1/9th East Norfolk and 1/38th First Staffordshire Regiments.) 2nd Brigade, Maj Gen. Ronald Ferguson (36th Herefordshire, 1/40th Second Somersetshire and 1/71st Highland Light Regiments.) 3rd Brigade, Brig. Gen. Miles Nightingall (29th Worcestershire and 1/82nd Prince of Wales Volunteer Regiments.) 4th Brigade, Brig. Gen. Barnard Bowes (1/6th First Warwickshire and 1/32nd Cornwall Regiments.) 5th Brigade, Brig. Gen. James Catiland Crawfurd (1/45th Nottinghamshire and 1/91st Argyllshire Regiments.) 6th Brigade, Brig. Gen. Henry Fane (1/50th West Kent and 5/60th Royal American Regiments plus four companies of 2/95th Rifles.) 7th Brigade, Brig. Gen. Robert Anstruther (2/9th East Norfolk, 2/43rd Monmouthshire, 2/52nd Oxfordshire and 97th Queen's Own Regiments.) 8th Brigade, Brig. Gen. Wroth Palmer Acland (2nd Queen's Royal and 20th East Devonshire Regiments plus two companies of 1/95th) Portuguese Brigade Colonel Nicolas Trant (Trante?) (12th, 21st, 24th Line Battalions, 6th Cazadores)

Portuguese Cavalry (6th, 11th, 12th Cavalry Regiments) 20th Light Dragoons

Army of Portugal General de Division Jean-Andoche Junot

Division Loison, GD. Louis-Henri Loison GB Jean Baptiste Solignac's Brigade (3/12th and 3/15th Light and 3/58th Line Regiments.) GB. Hugues Charlot's Brigade (3/32nd and 3/82 Line Regiments.)

Division DeLaborde, GD. Henri-Francois DeLaborde GB. Jean-Guillaume-Barthelemy Thomieres' Brigade (3/2nd and 3/4th Light and 1-2/70 Line Regiments.) GB. Antoine-Francois Brennier de Montmorand's Brigade (1-2/86 Line Regiment plus two companies of the 4th Swiss Regiment.)

Division of United Grenadiers, GD. Francois-Etienne Kellerman GB. St. Clair's Brigade (1st and 2nd Batallion of Grenadiers) GB. Maransin's Brigade (3rd and 4th Batallion of Grenadiers)

Cavalry Division, GD. Pierre Maragon (3rd, 4th, 5th Provisional Dragoons, Volunteer Squadron of French living in Lisbon and 26th Chasseurs a Cheval.)

Reinforcement 3/66 Line Regiment and four picked companies from the garrisons around Lisbon.

Hypothetical Division Travot, GD. Jean-Pierre Travot (1st Hanoverian Legion, Legion du Midi, 2/47th, 3/26th and 3-4/66th Line Regiments and some companies of the 4th Swiss Regiment.)

Series Charts and Tables (NBS v3.0)

These are the six player-aid chart pages ("Napoleonic Battle Series, p 1" to "p 6") from the official NBS v3.0 charts file (Multi-Man Publishing, 2007), transcribed from the page images and text layer. Graphic hex diagrams are described in words or omitted.

Chart p 1 - Command Phase

Random Events Check [29.0] (optional): Roll one die. If result is 1 an event occurs (see p 6).

Discover Distorted Orders [6.5.3]: 5 or more on one die to notice a Dt order.

Order Issue [6.4]

Command Points [6.4.1]

Commander's Rating	4	3	2	1	0
Command Points	16	15	13	10	7

Order costs = Method + Type

Method: Oral	Method: Written	Type: Engage	Type: Complex	Type: General
2	5	5	5	1

Order Log [6.4.5]: Time Issued, Sender & Receiver, Order, Arrival Time, Method & Type, Acceptance Status.

Order Delivery Restrictions [6.4.6]: Army Commanders must be stacked with their HQ to issue Aide delivered orders. They may give In-person orders anywhere, but between each such order, they must pass through Army HQ.

Order Delivery Time [6.4.7]: Aide-delivered orders delivery time: add current turn to Distance (in Commander MPs) /10 (round up). In-person orders are received the same turn they are sent.

General Orders [6.3.2]: Allows for anything except Offensive Movement and Combat (marching, defending, resting, etc.). While under General Orders: Stragglers may be recovered; Initiative is easier.

Complex Orders [6.3.3]: Orders which use alternatives (...if... then...) or stages of both Engage and General Orders. Apply rules for the type of order currently being executed. Attack Stoppage Check required only in turns when Engage Orders will be executed.

Engage Orders [6.3.1]: Permits Offensive Movement and Offensive Combat. Defending is not an Offensive mission. While under Engage Orders: Stragglers may not be recovered; Commands must roll Attack Stoppage every turn.

No Orders [6.3.4]: Command Ranges are halved; Units may not initiate Close Combat (except against Skirmishers); Cavalry may only execute Reaction Charges; Artillery may only fire Opportunity Fire; Order acceptance is easier; Straggler recovery is easier.

Local Initiative [6.6]

Commanders on the spot can exercise Local Initiative. There are three types of Local Initiative:

Initiative [6.6.1]: Commanders can issue orders on a successful Initiative roll.

Commander's Rating (2 for Independent Brigades); +1 if already under General Orders:

Roll (11..66)	0	1	2	3	4	5
Loose Cannon	11-14	11-13	11-13	11-12	11-12	11
No Effect	15-65	14-64	14-63	13-61	13-53	12-51
Initiative	66	65-66	64-66	62-66	54-66	52-66

Commands which get new orders through Local Initiative discard their current orders and any orders awaiting acceptance.

Default Defense [6.6.2]: Any command under orders may, at the start of any friendly Command Phase, adopt a "Defend in Place" General Order.

Emergency Withdrawal [6.6.3]: Any command, under orders or not, that is threatened by destruction may conduct an Emergency Withdrawal. The Commander (or Corps HQ for a corps) must withdraw a minimum of 6 hexes to a maximum of his full Movement Allowance. Command Range is halved. Units in the command must return to Command Range - they cannot remain in place as per 6.11.4. After the move, all infantry units must check for Stragglers (Morale Check). The command enters No Orders status in the following turn.

Attack Stoppage Checks [6.7]

Roll if a command will execute Engage Orders the current turn.

Step 1. Cross-index the number of Wrecked Sub-Units in the command (+1 if Commander is lost; rows) with the number of Sub-Units in the command (columns). The number found is the result used on the second table. (A blank cell means that combination cannot occur.)

Wrecked \ Sub-Units	10	9	8	7	6	5	4	3	2	1
0	1	1	1	1	1	1	1	1	1	1
1	1	1	1	1	1	1	2	2	2

Step 2. Cross-index the result with the Commander's Rating (2 for Independent Brigades):

Result	Rating 0	Rating 1,2	Rating 3,4
1	4	3	3
2	7	6	5
3	10	9	8
4	12	11	10

Roll equal to or more than the number on 2 dice or stop the attack and execute an Emergency Withdrawal. Night: -3 to die roll.

Sub-unit definitions. Corps: Each division counts as one sub-unit. Division: Each brigade counts as a sub-unit. Brigade: A brigade is considered to have only one sub-unit (itself). Artillery never counts.

Delay Reduction [6.5.2] & New Order Acceptance [6.5]

Acceptance Number = Sender's Command Rating + Receiver's Command Rating + Method + Type + Current Order, where:

Method	In-person	Aide Oral	Aide Written
Modifier	+2	-1	0

Type	Engage	Complex	General
Modifier	-2	-2	0

Current Order	Engage	General	No Order
Modifier	-1	0	+1

Roll two dice (11..66). Columns are the Acceptance Number:

Result	-3 or less	-2	-1	0	1	2	3	4	5	6	7	8	9	10 or more
Dt	11-32	11-26	11-23	11-16	11-14	11-13	11-13	11-12	11-12	11	11	-	-	-
D6

Dt: Order is distorted or lost. Roll each turn: 5 or more on one die to notice. D6: Roll each turn: 6 on one die to Accept. D5: Roll each turn: 5 or more on one die to Accept. D4: Roll each turn: 4 or more on one die to Accept. A: Order is Accepted.

Chart p 2 - Movement Phase

Phasing Fire Phase [17.0, 18.0] (see p 3).

Movement Table [12.2]

Terrain	Hindering	Infantry: Line (2)	Infantry: Column	Infantry: Skirmish	Cavalry: Light	Cavalry: Heavy	Cavalry: Blown	Artillery (Limbered): Foot	Artillery (Limbered): Horse	Cmd & HQs
Movement Allowance		8	8	6 (3)	14	12	6	6	10	14
Formation Change		1 (4)	1 (4)	1 (4)	-	-	-

(Cells shown repeated across several columns are single cells spanning those columns on the printed chart.)

DG units halve their MPs. Routed units can not expend MPs. Units can always make a minimum move of one hex, unless the hex is Prohibited.

Squares may only move one clear hex, and only if they pass a Morale Check [8.3.2].
Lines may spend all MPs to move one hex backward.
Skirmishers may 'tag along' with Columns.
Levies must spend 4 MPs and cannot form Square.
In addition to other terrain in hex. In complex cases read 'levels' as 'colors'.
Lines in Town/Village have all around facing.
Road Movement.

[B] Blocking: terrain blocks LOS. [H] Hindering: no charges allowed into the hex (Fortified terrain is always hindering.) Sh: Units become Sh if not using Road Movement to enter this hex (including retreat). DG: Units become DG if not using Road Movement to enter this hex (including retreat).

Facing change: Per hex corner 1 MP (unless using Road Movement). Turn 180 degrees 1 MP (free for (un)Limbering artillery). Units may freely reface at the end of any retreat, Charge, or Close Combat (except in Town/Village [19.5]). Skirmishers, Commanders and Routed units have no facing for movement purposes.

Infantry Zone of Influence [11.0]: Lines and Combat Columns with Sh or better morale create a Zone of Influence (ZoI) into their front hexes. No ZoIs in friendly occupied hexes, Town/Village hexes, Prohibited Terrain or Fortified hexes. ZoI Effects: Moving from one ZoI to another ZoI = M-1. Changing formation in a ZoI = M-1. Retreating through a ZoI = M-1. No rally in a ZoI.

Stacking Limits [9.0]: In a single hex: three A fire levels and/or 10 gun points and/or one full strength Skirmisher and/or any number of Commanders and HQs. Stacks can have only one Morale State (adopt the worst Morale State).

Reaction Charge [16.5] (see p 4): Charges outside of the "frontal cone" require the charging unit to pass a Morale Check [21.2].

Morale	A	B	C	D	E
Die roll	3	4	5	6	6

Roll equal to or higher. Modifier: Stacked with a 2-rated or better Commander +1.

Artillery Opportunity Fire [17.4] (see p 3): When a unit moves into or attempts to change formation in or tries to leave an artillery unit's Opportunity Fire Zone, the artillery may fire. Should a unit enter the artillery's hex from its flank, the artillery can still fire.

Command Ranges [6.11.1]: Check at end of the Movement Phase. Corps to Division: 8 hexes. Division to Brigade: 4 hexes. Woods, Swamps, and Steep Slopes count as 2 hexes. Adjacent units are always In Command, even across tributaries.

Out of Command Effects: A unit starting its move Out of Command must either remain in place or move to "catch up." Out of Command artillery units may only Opportunity Fire.

Chart p 3 - Fire Phase

Skirmisher Fire [18.0]

Determine the Modified Fire Value: Firing Skirmishers Fire Value, minus Fire Value of Skirmisher in the target hex, plus Fire Value Modifiers. Roll less than or equal to using one die.

Fire Value (FV) Table:

Unit Quality	Full	Reduced
Elite	2	1
Regular	1	1/2

Fire Value Modifiers: Target in Fortified terrain or Town/Village -2; Target is Limbered or in Square +1; Rifles firing +1.

Skirmishers can fire at adjacent hexes only. They can fire in any direction. DG, Routed or Out of Command [24.2.1] may not fire.

A Hit on cavalry causes M-1 (and a Commander Loss Check). A Hit on infantry causes M-1 and one Straggler loss. A Hit on artillery causes M-1 and one gun point loss. Note that Skirmishers can choose to target artillery separately, even if the artillery is not the top unit in the stack [14.2.4].

IMPORTANT: Skirmishers block artillery LOS if they are adjacent to the artillery.

Artillery Fire [17.0]

Cross-reference the number of gun points (GPs) in the battery with range to the target. The result is the Fire Value (FV) for Light [Heavy] Artillery.

GPs \ Range in Hexes	1	2	3	4	5-7	8-9
5	5 [5]	4 [4]	2 [3]	1 [2]	1 [2]	1 [1]
4	4 [4]	3 [4]	1 [2]	1 [2]	1 [2]	1 [1]
3	3 [4]	2 [3]	1 [2]	1 [2]	1 [1]	[1]
2	2 [3]	1 [2]

Roll one die and check the appropriate column:

DR	Fire Value: less than 1	1	2	3	4	5	6
1	M-1	1M-2	1M-2	1(1)M-2	2(1)M-2	2(2)M-2	3(2)M-2
2	0	0	1	1	1(1)	2(1)	2(2)
3	M-1	M-1	M-1	1M-2	1M-2	1(1)M-2	2(1)M-2

Fire Value Modifiers: +1 Target is AA+, cavalry, Limbered, Column, Square, or flanked Line. -1 Target is in Town/Village or Fortified hex. -1 Target entered Close Combat through one of firer's flank hexsides. -1 Target is Skirmisher.

Loss Adjustments [17.1.7]: Unwrecked A and B morale units and C morale units stacked with a 1-rated or better Commander reduce any Morale Change result by one.

Special cases: DG, Routed, and 0 strength units may not fire. No artillery fire at night except Cannister. Only 1 GP can fire out of a Town/Village hex.

Cannister [17.4.9]: When artillery Opportunity Fires at units entering their hex, roll twice, but ignore the modifier for targets in Column, size AA+, or terrain. Add the casualties AND the morale result together, but apply Loss Adjustments separately to each roll.

Grand Batteries [17.3]: When more than one artillery unit fires, sort the firing units by Light/Heavy and add up the gun points in each category. Read the Fire Values from the table, using the longest distance for each type. Roll for Light and Heavy artillery separately. The losses are added together, but use only the worst morale change. If a category contains more than 5 gun points, treat it as separate fires of 5 points each, with odd GPs combined in a single fire.

Only one artillery unit may fire at the same target hex, unless all firers are adjacent to the target, are in Close Combat, or qualify under national exceptions. FRANCE: Pre-1805 units may fire together if stacked with or adjacent to each other. From 1805 no restrictions. RUSSIA: 1807 or later units may fire together if stacked with or adjacent to each other. PRUSSIA: 1813 or later units may fire together if stacked with or adjacent to each other. AUSTRIA: 1809 or later units may fire together if stacked with or adjacent to each other and of the same division. Corps artillery counts as its own division. From 1813, drop "division" restriction.

Commander Losses [25.4]: When a unit suffers Permanent Casualties and/or Stragglers roll two dice. On an 11 or 12, one Commander Loss takes place and the stack is M-1.

Gun Loss Table [23.1.1]: Roll one die for artillery (Limbered or not) that must retreat after losing a Close Combat or Charge. Unlimbered guns must Limber to retreat.

DR	0-3	4	5	6	7+
GP lost	0	1	2	3	All

All guns are Horse Artillery -1. Attacked by cavalry +2.

Chart p 4 - Charge

Check to Stand [16.2.2, 16.4.1]

Checking Order (Cavalry): against cavalry [16.4.1.1] - Defender first; against infantry/artillery [16.2.2] - Defender only.

Morale	A	B	C	D	E
Die roll	1	2	3	4	5

Roll equal to or higher on one die to stand (an unmodified 6 always stands). If the first checker fails, the second checker automatically wins (does not roll).

Die Roll Modifiers (Max. +/-4), both cases: BL +1; Sh -1; DG -2; Wrecked -2; Commander Advantage +1; Opponent stack twice the size -1; Attacked in rear -2; Artillery and/or Skirmishers only (unless in Fortified terrain) -2. Routed units and Limbered artillery always lose [16.3].

Against cavalry: Light vs. Heavy cav. -1; Defending Blown or stationary cav. -2.

Against infantry/artillery: Defending in Square +1; Defending in March Column -1; Defending in Line (1) -1. (1) If both flank hexes are occupied by friendly units in Line or Hindering terrain, the Line is treated as a Combat Column.

Cavalry Charges against Cavalry [16.4]

Sequence (in Movement Phase): 1) Attacker announces target. 2) Attacker moves into target hex. May trigger Reaction Charges [16.5] & Opportunity Fire [17.4]. 3) Check to Stand [16.4.1]. Defender first. 4) Determine combat result. 5) Retreat, Blown, 6-12 hexes (6 hexes if Routed).

Losses (both sides roll one die; "•" = Blood Lust possible):

DR	•Won	•Draw	Lost
1	0	0	1M-1
2	0	1	2M-1
3	1	1	2M-1
4	2	2M-2	3M-2
5	2M-1	3M-1	3M-2
6	3M-1	3M-2	4M-3

Loss Adjustments: Both Size B or C: reduce losses by 1. Both Size AA+: add 1 to losses.

Cavalry Charges against Infantry/Artillery [16.2]

Sequence (in Movement Phase): 1) Attacker announces target. 2) Target may form Square [16.2.1]. May trigger Opportunity Fire [17.4]. 3) Attacker moves into hex. May trigger Reaction Charges [16.5] & Opportunity Fire. 4) Defender Checks to Stand [16.2.2]. If successful, go to 6. 5) Charge Successful [16.2.3]. Roll for defending artillery Opportunity Fire. Check combat results. Follow-on Charge [16.2.7] may be carried out up to three times. Otherwise, charge ends [16.2.8]. Retreat, Blown, 6-12 hexes. 6) Breakoff Attempt [16.2.4]. If cavalry fails roll, go to 8. 7) Determine effect on the Breakoff table. Charge ends [16.2.8]. Retreat, Blown, 6-12 hexes (6 hexes if Routed). 8) Cavalry Repulsed [16.2.6]. Roll for defending artillery Opportunity Fire. Determine Repulse result. Charge ends. Retreat, Blown, 6-12 hexes (6 hexes if Routed).

Charge Successful [16.2.3] (both roll one die):

DR	Attacker's Losses: All	Defender's Losses (+Rout): AA+	AB-A	B-C
1	•0	1(3)	0(1)	0(1)
2	0	1(2)	1(1)	1
3	1	1(2)	1(1)	1
4	1	2(1)	2	1
5	2M-1	3(1)	2	2

Attacker size A or AB +1; Attacker size AA+ +2. • = Blood Lust possible.

Breakoff Attempt [16.2.4]: Roll equal to or higher to Breakoff.

Morale	A	B	C	D	E
Die roll	3	4	5	6	6

Modifier: Stacked with a 2-rated or better Commander +1. British cavalry must be stacked with a Commander to Breakoff. Ignore the modifier for being stacked with a Commander [26.4].

Breakoff [16.2.5]: Defender rolls one die, and is M-1 on an odd result. Cavalry rolls one die and checks table. OF: Artillery in target hex may fire before Breakoff.

DR	Breakoff
1	OF
2	-
3	-
4	M-1
5	M-1
6	M-2
7	M-3

Modifiers by Attacker Morale: A -2, B -1, C 0, D +1, E +2.

Repulse [16.2.6]: Defender rolls one die, and is M-1 on an odd result. Cavalry rolls one die and checks table.

DR	Repulse
1	1M-1
2	1M-1
3	2M-1
4	2M-1
5	3M-2
6	3M-2
7	4M-2

Modifiers: Defender in Line +2; Defender in Square -2; Defender size B or C -1; Attacker size AA+ +1.

Follow-on Charges [16.2.7] can either attack the current target, or any hex within 2 hexes. If the Follow-on Charge attacks the current target, just roll again on the Defender Losses Table. The charging cavalry takes no additional losses. If the Follow-on Charge targets a new hex, resolve the Follow-on Charge as a regular charge. If the target of the Follow-on Charge is adjacent to the original target, and the original target was able to form Square but chose not to, the Follow-on Charge target may not form Square either. In subsequent Follow-on Charges, targets within 1 hex of the last target may not form Square, targets 2 hexes away may form Square normally.

General note: All conditions for modifiers are with regards to your own units unless otherwise noted. • Blood Lust [21.3.3]: On an unmodified roll of 1, Unwrecked A & B morale units and C morale units stacked with a 1-rated or better Commander gain M+2 (instead of the table result). Commander Losses [25.4]: When a unit suffers Permanent Casualties and/or Stragglers roll two dice. On an 11 or 12, one Commander Loss takes place and the stack is M-1.

Chart p 5 - Close Combat

(in Movement Phase) Attacker enters defender's hex, paying +2 MP. Defending artillery may Opportunity Fire [17.4]. (in Close Combat Phase) see below.

Check to Stand [15.2, 19.5]

The final result is Defender Won, Attacker Won, or Firefight (if both sides pass) [15.3.3].

Checking Order (Infantry), read from top to bottom:

Case	First checker
1) Defender in Town/Village	Attacker only
2) Defender in Fortified terrain	Attacker
3) Attack from higher top elevation	Defender
3) Attack from lower top elevation	Attacker
4) None of the above	Smallest [7.4]
5) Equal size	Attacker

Morale	A	B	C	D	E
Die roll	1	2	3	4	5

Roll equal to or higher on one die to stand (an unmodified 6 always stands). If the first checker fails, the second checker automatically wins (does not roll). Routed units and Limbered artillery always lose [15.4.1].

Die Roll Modifiers (Max. +/-4): BL +1; Commander Advantage +1; Sh -1; Opponent stack twice the size -1; DG -2; Attacked in rear -2; Wrecked -2; Artillery and/or Skirmishers only (unless in Fortified terrain) -2; Defending in Fortified terrain +1; Attacking in Line -1; Skirmisher Disadvantage -1; Attacking in March Column -1; Night -2; Attacking a Line in Town/Village -1.

Determine combat result [15.2.3]

Both sides roll one die and check the appropriate table. Maximum DRM +/-2.

Loss Adjustments (do not use for Firefights): • Blood Lust [21.3.3]: On an unmodified roll of 1, Unwrecked A & B morale units and C morale units stacked with a 1-rated or better Commander gain M+2 (instead of the table result). Night: always at least one Straggler [15.3.7]. Size B&C halve losses (round down, but never below 1) [15.3.6]. Size AA+ unit reduces M- results by one level [15.3.4]. The winner never takes more Permanent Casualties than the loser (unless the winner is in March Column). Ignore excess casualties [15.3.1].

Firefight [15.3.3] (Opponent's Formation and Size):

Die Roll	Opp. Comb. Col. AB+ / Line B+	Opp. Comb. Col. A-C / Line C
0	0	0
1	1	0
2	1(1)	0(1)
3	2M-1	1M-1
4	2(1)M-1	1(1)M-1
5	2(2)M-2	2(1)M-2
6	2(3)	2(2)

Die Roll Modifiers: Size AA+ OR In Column +1; Opponent at different elevation -1; Skirmisher firing -2; Defending in Fortified terrain -2; Night -2. Loss Adjustments: Size C units: halve losses (round down, but never below 1).

Attacker Won - Attacker's Losses (•) by Attacker's Morale:

DR	A	B	C	D	E
1	0	0	0(1)	0(2)	0(2)
2	0(1)M+1	0(1)	0(2)	0(3)	0(4)M-1
3	0(2)	0(3)	1(3)M-1	1(3)M-1	1(4)M-1
4	1(2)	1(3)M-1	1(4)M-1	1(4)M-1	1(4)M-2
5

Modifiers: Size AA+ +1; Night -2.

Attacker Won - Defender's Losses (+Defender Routs) by Defender's Morale:

DR	A	B	C	D	E
1	1(3)	1(4)	0(6)	0(6)	0(7)
2	2(3)	2(4)	1(6)	1(7)	0(8)
3	2(4)	2(5)	1(7)	1(8)	1(9)
4	2(5)	2(6)	2(7)	2(9)	1(10)
5

Modifiers: Size AA+ +1; Attacker in Line -1; Night -2.

Defender Won - Attacker's Losses (+Attacker Retreats) (•) by Attacker's Morale:

DR	A	B	C	D	E
1	1(1)	1(1)	0(2)M-1	0(3)M-1	0(4)M-2
2	1(2)M-1	1(2)M-1	1(3)M-1	0(4)M-2	0(5)M-2
3	2(1)M-1	2(2)M-1	1(4)M-2	1(5)M-2	0(6)M-3
4	2(2)M-1	2(3)M-2	2(4)M-2	1(6)M-2	1(7)M-3
5

Modifiers: In Column vs. defending Line +1; Size AA+ +1; Night -2.

Defender Won - Defender's Losses (•) by Defender's Morale:

DR	A	B	C	D	E
1	0	0	0	0M+1	0(1)
2	0M+1	0	0(1)	0(1)	0(2)M-1
3	0(1)	0(1)	0(2)	0(2)M-1	0(3)M-1
4	1(1)	1(2)	1(2)M-1	1(2)M-1	1(4)M-1
5

Modifiers: In Column +1; Size AA+ +1; In Fortified terrain -2; Night -2.

General note: All conditions for modifiers are with regards to your own units unless otherwise noted. Commander Losses [25.4]: When a unit suffers Permanent Casualties and/or Stragglers roll two dice. On an 11 or 12, one Commander Loss takes place and the stack is M-1.

Chart p 6 - Rally Phase & Miscellaneous

Morale Check [21.2]

Morale	A	B	C	D	E
Die roll	3	4	5	6	6

Modifier for all cases: Stacked with a 2-rated or better Commander +1.

In the Movement Phase: Stragglers - Emergency Withdrawal [6.6.3.6] and Forced March [12.5.6]: Suffer 1 Straggler loss if unit rolls lower. Square Movement [8.3.2]: Roll equal to or higher to move while in Square. Reaction Charge [16.5]: Roll equal to or higher to Reaction Charge outside the frontal "cone". Breakoff Attempt [16.2.4]: Roll equal to or higher to Breakoff. British cavalry must be stacked with a Commander to Breakoff. Ignore the modifier for being stacked with a Commander [26.4].

In the Rally Phase: Rallying Routed [21.5]: Roll equal to or higher to rally from Routed to DG. Cavalry Recovery [22.2.3]: Roll equal to or higher to recover from Blown. Straggler Recovery [20.3.2]: To recover Stragglers units must: be at least 4 (2 at night) hexes away from all enemy units; have a Morale State of Normal or BloodLust; be In Command [6.11.1]; not be under Engage Orders; in the current turn: have spent no MPs, not been fired upon, not fought in Close Combat. Roll equal to or higher to recover one Straggler. A & B morale units recover two Stragglers on an unmodified 6. Modifiers for Straggler Recovery: Night +1; In Fortified terrain or Town/Village +1; In No Orders status +1; Stacked with a 2-rated or better Commander +1.

Random Events [29.0]: Roll two dice to determine event: 2 Loose Cannon; 3 Game Table; 4 Order Lost; 5 Game Table; 6 Delay Reinforcements; 7 Cavalry Recovery; 8 Advance Reinforcements; 9 Game Table; 10 Commander Loss; 11 Artillery Accident; 12 Loose Cannon.

Morale Effects Summary [21.1]: Blood Lust (BL): affects Check to Stand. Shaken (Sh): affects Check to Stand, no Blown recovery (cavalry), no Straggler recovery (infantry), no charge (cavalry). Disorganized (DG): as Sh plus Movement Allowance halved, no fire (artillery and skirmishers), no forming Square (infantry). Rout (R): as DG plus no moving, all-round rear facing, always loses in Close Combat, counts as Wrecked. Blood Lust Recovery [21.5]: If not adjacent to enemy units, remove BL. If adjacent, roll one die and remove BL on a 1 or 2.

Commander Effects: Provides a DRM to Check to Stand and Morale Check rolls [15.2.2, 16.2.2, 16.4.1.4, 21.2]. British cavalry must be stacked with a Commander to Breakoff [26.4]. Reduces M-combat effects from artillery fire when stacked with C morale troops [17.1.7]. Allows Blood Lust result when stacked with C morale troops [21.3.3]. Fighters [25.5]: Commanders marked with F are +2 to their printed rating (max. 4) for combat and morale purposes.

Casualties: Reading Combat Results [14.3, 20.0]: The first number indicates Permanent Casualties. The parenthesized number indicates Stragglers. The M-# indicates a Morale Change. Example: 1(1)M-1 is one Permanent Casualty, one Straggler loss and a one level morale reduction (normal to Sh, or Sh to DG, etc.). Commander Losses [25.4]: When a unit suffers Permanent Casualties and/or Stragglers roll two dice. On an 11 or 12, one Commander Loss takes place and the stack is M-1. Wrecked [21.6]: The instant a unit becomes Wrecked it is M-1 (including Line Extensions). Eliminated Units [20.3.2]: If an infantry unit is totally eliminated place it 5 turns ahead of the current turn on the Turn Record Track. On that turn it may start trying to recover Stragglers. Gun Loss Table [23.1.1]: see chart p 3.

Special Combats:

Skirmisher vs. Skirmisher [15.4.4.1]: Do not use Loss tables. The winner, or both sides in Firefights, are unaffected. Losers are M-2 and are Reduced on a further roll of 1 on one die. In Firefights the lowest modified Check to Stand roll retreats (attacker in case of a draw).
Infantry vs. Skirmisher [15.1.7]: If infantry attacks a lone Skirmisher, there is no combat; the Skirmisher automatically retreats one hex. The infantry still pays +2 MP to enter the hex. Skirmishers in Hindering terrain or stacked with artillery may stand and are treated as C-size infantry [15.4.4].
Cavalry vs. Skirmisher [16.3.3]: Skirmisher destroyed unless it manages to "dive for cover." The cavalry is not Blown and may continue its Charge if the Skirmisher was not its target.
Infantry vs. Cavalry [22.1]: When infantry moves adjacent to cavalry, the cavalry must retreat 6-12 hexes (is not Blown) OR Charge. Blown cavalry attacked by infantry automatically retreats.
Stationary Cavalry [16.4.3.2]: Winning stationary cavalry is not Blown, nor has to retreat.
Square [15.4.5]: When attacked by infantry, Squares revert to Column (Line if part of a Line Extension) before combat and are M-1 (but DG at worst). This does not trigger Opportunity Fire.
Lone Artillery [15.4.3.1]: Is treated as a C-size unit and Checks to Stand normally. The attacker does not roll on the Loss tables. If forced to retreat, artillery rolls on the Gun Loss Table.
Routed units & Limbered artillery [15.4.1, 15.4.3.1, 16.3]: Automatically fail Check to Stand.
Town/Village Fighting [19.0]: March Columns are treated as Combat Columns (all nationalities). Only the attacker Checks to Stand (there are no Firefights). If the attacker wins, it can't reface but can advance a hex (and Close Combat again). The attacking unit can continue to move and attack in this way as long as it stays in Town/Village hexes and doesn't Rout.

NBS Series Errata

Transcribed from the official NBS v3.0 Errata file (6 pp). Items are listed under the series version they were issued against; later entries supersede earlier ones where they conflict. Rule numbers refer to the rules version named in each heading. The Austerlitz-specific items at the end apply only to that game.

Each Entry has the Date of LAST Revision:

NBS Series (ver 2.0)(6 Dec 96)

The "Mixed Fire Modifiers"Chart referred to in 24.0 actually is a reference to the Regular Fires Chart.
In the Cavalry Charge Sequence, the branching at the end of step F is incorrect. If the defender does not retreat, the sequence should drop to step G, not jump to I. Furthermore, the example on page 20 of the Cavalry Charge Sequence has the morale checks in the opposite order from the actual sequence (the sequence is right).
In 15.1c, the fires generated should occur before OR after the formation changewhichever is worse for the defender. The attacker makes the choice.
24.2 is in error-cavalry recalled during a charge attempt (even an intended feint) does indeed become blown.
There is no Morale modifier for being stacked with artillery-the designer's notes reference an earlier rule that was dropped in that regard. (What does he know about it anyway?)
At the end of 25.3c change "they must share the morale states of any units which retreat through them"to "they must share the morale states of any units which end up stacked with them."
Rule 23.1 is correct and the example following 23.1o is incorrect regarding multiple close combats. A phasing unit can conduct no more than one Close Combat per phase.
Delete "& cavalry"from the second paragraph of rule 10.4. Cavalry never suffers straggler losses-to include any normally required during Emergency Corps Retreats.
(addition to 15.1b) Exiting LOS within a Close Fire Zone constitutes "leaving the Close Fire Zone"for Opportunity Fire purposes (i.e. driving across a Close Fire Zone and diving in back of some trees will draw opportunity fires).
(addition) Non-Phasing infantry can make one attempt to form square whenever moving enemy cavalry moves at or within 3 hexes (where a clear LOS exists), even when that cavalry has not announced a cavalry charge. Each infantry stack can make two attempts to form square when enemy cavalry approaches-once as per this rule, and the second if a charge is announced. Furthermore, each approaching enemy cavalry unit causes this triggering to occur independently. The phasing player can use this rule to "fake out"portions of the enemy line to form square when no cavalry charge is forthcoming. (Thanks to J.D. Caro for this rule.) 11. The maximum number of fire points which can be generated by infantry in a single hex is 6 at close combat range and 2 at range 1. This is in addition to the rule regarding "no more than an A can fire out of a hex". In other words, a B and a C in one hex in line only generate 6 fire points, not 9, in close combat.

NBS Series (ver 2.1) (01 Feb 01)

Counters

The description of Heavy vs Light artillery in 27.0 refers to the old counter design. On the new counter design Heavy artillery designated with a Black Gun Point number. Light artillery is designated with the White Gun Point number.
As is the case above, the cavalry heavy vs light description in 24.0a refers to the old graphic format. On the new counter design Heavy cavalry is cavalry with a Star in the center of its symbol.

Rules, General

16.1e Delete "or into a close combat." and insert "but may be into a Close Combat provided the unit does not need to change facing to do so. Units entering Close Combat this way are Shaken even before the Close Combat Subsequence begins."
In order to use road movement rates units may not move stacked with units other than skirmishers, nor may they pass through, or be passed through by, any other unit using road movement rates. Leaders and HQ's are excepted from this.
11.0c should not mention mixing formations between extensions and parents (extensions and parents must have the same formation). Also, the reference to 17.0b serves no purpose.
The reference to "Target Mods" in the blocked off text of 11.1 should be to "Morale Mods."
The reference to a "Formation Effects Chart" in 11.3 should be to the Fire Point Tables. 8. Skirmishers can violate the requirements of 11.5b when executing 11.5e.
At the moment infantry declares a Close Combat on a Cavalry unit, the cavalry unit can retreat and become Blown to avoid it.
For 11.5b, the "unit" the skirmisher must stay at or within two hexes of must be a friendly non-skirmisher.

LOS Issues

The player can never fire over friendly units, this includes skirmishers, regardless of LOS considerations.
Skirmishers don't block LOS, but artillery units cannot fire through an enemy Skirmisher adjacent to them, despite being able to "see" through them.

Cavalry Handling

Cavalry cannot charge through friendly skirmishers (regular or reaction).
In part A) of 24.1c, change "be able to move through a hex 4 hexes from..." to "move through a hex 4 hexes from..." (The cav must actually move through this hex, not just "have one available".)
24.1 Cavalry Charge Procedure part H (Follow On Attack) implies that multiple follow-on attacks are allowed. 24.1m states that only one is allowed. 24.1m is incorrect and up to three follow-on attacks are allowed.
No Follow-on Attacks is allowed when the original target was a cavalry unit or during a reaction charge.
Cavalry can Reaction charge through enemy skirmishers (any number) to their real (triggered) target. This is an exception to the normal rules stating that a Reaction charge can have only one target. Skirmishers still have the ability to "run away" if the player so desires. Reduce each skirmisher overrun this way by one level (destroy if reduced), automatically.

Charts & Tables

Add * and "2" note entries to the MP cost for Swamp for Light and Heavy Cavalry.
Change the "I" to a "G" in step "F" of the Cavalry Charge sub-sequence. 20. Eliminate the Square vs Cav Fire Point Table and use the other Square Fire Point Table for all Square Fires. The +1 fire mod for firing against Cavalry (see below) applies here as well.
Change the Fire Table Modifier for Cavalry targets to +1 instead of +3. Leave the +3 modifier for the other target types mentioned (column, et al).
Movement Chart Addenda - Change the following movement costs I) Infantry Column: slope +1 and extreme slope +3 II) skirmishers: slope +1 III) Foot and Horse Artillery: secondary road 1.

Designers Notes

The Designers Notes contradicts rule 25.3c. The rule is correct.

NBS Series (ver 3.0) (15 Jan 08)

Due to events beyond our control the 3.0 tables in Talavera are messed up beyond belief. Download the latest tables at NBS 3.0 Tables
Command range (6.11) cannot be traced through enemy units. It can be traced through a ZoI.
Artillery fire (17.1.6) going through the intersection between the frontal and flank hex of the target does not get the flanking modifier.
Add 15.4.8 Exotic situations. If the attacker is forced to retreat into the hex where he came from, and this hex has become enemy occupied in the meantime, treat as follows: Cavalry and Skirmisher units must retreat (no choice) as per 15.1.7 and 15.1.8. Infantry and artillery (don't ask us how they got there) have to displace into an adjacent hex not occupied by an enemy unit, owner's choice.
16.4.3 Clarification. Both sides now retreat 6-12 hexes (attacker first) and THEN become Blown.
17.4.1 Clarification. Each artillery unit (or stack of artillery units) can only fire at a given stack once each Movement Phase. 7. 15.4.4 Errata. Change the last sentence to: If a Skirmisher can and chooses to stay and fight, treat it as a C-size infantry unit, but do not use any modifiers related to column or line formation.
Clarification. Opportunity fire triggers occurs "when a stack" do something.
16.5.11 New Rule. If an infantry unit triggers a reaction charge from an adjacent cavalry unit, that infantry unit can not form square as part of the following charge resolution. See 22.1.4
22.1.4 New Rule. If the cavalry unit reaction charges the infantry unit moving adjacent as per above, that infantry unit can not form square as part of the following charge resolution. If the unit was already in square when triggering the charge (for example by moving in square adjacent to the enemy), it still gets the benefit of being in square.
16.4 Clarification. … possibly triggering Reaction Charges and/or Opportunity Fire along the way. Artillery in the target hex can fire Cannister (17.4.9) as opportunity fire (unless the target reaction charges) ...
21.4.1 Clarification …previous hex. So, for example, if a retreating unit is within 3 hexes of the nearest enemy unit and it has to retreat another hex, that hex cannot be within 2 hexes of any enemy unit (not necessarily the unit that was previously closest.)

6-01 Austerlitz(Before 6 Dec 94)

Entry Hex C should be the road entering at A63.07
In scenario 7.3, Napoleon, the HQ, and the French Army supply set up in hex A28.29, not A28.28.
In section 1.0, the Santon Redoubt is in A34.32, not A36.32 and the Sokolnitz Castle is in A17.29, not A17.30.